Proline Promass 83, Description of Device Functions

Proline Promass 83, Description of Device Functions
Description of Device Functions
Proline Promass 83
Coriolis Mass Flow Measuring System
BA060D/06/en/11.04
50098510
valid as of software version:
V 2.00.XX (device software)
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
2
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
Notes on using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1
1.2
1.3
Using the table of contents to locate a function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the graphic of the function matrix to locate a function description . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the index of the function matrix to locate a function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
Function Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1
General layout of the function matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Blocks (A, B, C, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Groups (AAA, AEA, CAA, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 Function groups (000, 020, 060, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 Functions (0000, 0001, 0002, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.5 Codes identifying cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Block MEASURED VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1
Group MEASURING VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Function group MAIN VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group SYSTEM UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Function group ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group SPECIAL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Function group ARBITRARY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
3.3
4
12
12
17
17
20
22
22
Block QUICK SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.0.1
4.0.2
4.0.3
Setup Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Pulsating flow Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Gas measurement Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5
Block USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.1
Group CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Function group BASIC CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Function group UN-/LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group MAIN LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Function group MULTIPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group ADDITIONAL LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Function group MULTIPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group INFORMATION LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Function group MULTIPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
5.3
5.4
Endress+Hauser
8
8
8
8
8
9
35
35
37
38
39
39
41
43
43
46
49
49
52
6
Block TOTALIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.1
6.2
Group TOTALIZERS (1...3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group HANDLING TOTALIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Block OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.1
Group CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
56
56
58
59
3
Table of Contents
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.2
7.3
8
Block INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.1
Group STATUS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Block BASIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
9.1
Group HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group PROCESS PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 Function group EPD PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3 Function group REFERENCE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4 Function group ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5 Function group PRESSURE CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group SENSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2 Function group FLOW COEFFICIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.3 Function group DENSITY COEFFICIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.4 Function group ADDITIONAL COEFFICIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2
9.3
9.4
111
111
112
113
114
119
119
120
121
121
123
125
127
130
131
131
133
133
134
135
136
10
Block SPECIAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.1
Group DENSITY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group BATCHING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Function group VALVE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.3 Examples of setting parameters for batching processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.4 Function group SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.5 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.6 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Function group ACQUISITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.4 Function group DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.5 Function group REFERENCE DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.6 Function group TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.7 Function group TUBE DAMPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.8 Function group ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2
4
7.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.1.3 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Group PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.2.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.2.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.2.3 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Group RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.3.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.3.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
7.3.3 Function group INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.3.4 Information on the response of the relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.3.5 Switching responce of the relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
138
138
144
144
150
152
155
159
161
163
164
166
167
168
169
170
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Table of Contents
11
Block SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
11.1
Group SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Function group CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Function group OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group VERSION INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Function group DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 Function group SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 Function group AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.5 Function group I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.6 Function groups IN-/OUTPUT 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2
12
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.1
SI units (not for USA and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Low flow cut off, full scale value, pulse value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
US units (only for USA and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Low flow cut off, full scale value, pulse value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 Language, density, length, temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
Endress+Hauser
173
173
176
178
178
178
179
180
181
182
182
182
183
183
183
5
Table of Contents
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Registered trademarks
HART
Registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA
HistoROM™, T-DAT, S-DAT, F-CHIP
Registered trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH
6
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
1 Notes on using this Manual
1
Notes on using this Manual
There are various ways of locating the description of a function of your choice in the manual:
1.1
Using the table of contents to locate a function description
The designations of all the cells in the function matrix are listed in the table of contents. You can
use these unambiguous designations (such as USER INTERFACE, INPUTS, OUTPUTS, etc.) to
choose whichever functions are applicable to a particular set of conditions. The page references
show you exactly where to find the detailed descriptions of the functions in question.
The table of contents is on page 3 Table of Contents.
1.2
Using the graphic of the function matrix to locate a
function description
This step-by-step, top-down approach starts with the blocks, the highest level, and works down
through the matrix to the description of the function you need:
1.
2.
All blocks available, and their related groups, are illustrated on Page 10.
Select the block (or the group within the block) which you need for your application and use
the page reference to locate the information corresponding to the next level.
The page in question contains a graphic showing of the block with all its subordinate groups,
function groups and functions. Select the function which you need for your application and use
the page reference to locate the detailed function description.
1.3
Using the index of the function matrix to locate a function description
Each “cell” in the function matrix (blocks, groups, function groups, functions) has a unique identifier in the form of a code consisting of one or three letters or a three- or
four-digit number. The code identifying a selected “cell” appears at the top right on the local display.
Example:
A0001653-EN
The function matrix index lists the codes for all the available “cells” in alphabetic and consecutive
order, complete with the page references for the corresponding functions.
The index to the function matrix is on Page 185.
Endress+Hauser
7
2 Function Matrix
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
2
Function Matrix
2.1
General layout of the function matrix
The function matrix consists of four levels:
Blocks -> Groups -> Function groups -> Functions
AAA
000
0000
0001
ACA
040
042
0400
0420
0401 0402 0403
0421 0422 0423
B
BAA
200
2000
2001
C
CAA
202
204
206
2020
2040
2060
2021 2022 2023
… 2029
2041 2042 2043
… 2049
2061 2062 2063
2069
220
2200
2201
A
0002
2002
0003
2003
…
… 0409
… 0429
…
2009
…
D, E, …
CBA
0009
2202
2203
…
2209
A0000961
2.1.1
Blocks (A, B, C, etc.)
The blocks are the highest-level grouping of the operation options for the device. The blocks
include, for example: MEASURED VARIABLES, QUICK SETUP, USER INTERFACE, TOTALIZER,
etc.
2.1.2
Groups (AAA, AEA, CAA, etc.)
A block consists of one or more groups. Each group represents a more detailed selection of the operation options in the higher-order block. The groups in the “USER INTERFACE” block, for example,
include: CONTROL, MAIN LINE, ADDITIONAL LINE, etc.
2.1.3
Function groups (000, 020, 060, etc.)
A group consists of one or more function groups. Each function group represents a more detailed
selection of the operation options in the higher-order group.
The function groups in the “CONTROL” group, for example, include: BASIC CONFIGURATION,
UN-/LOCKING, OPERATION, etc.
2.1.4
Functions (0000, 0001, 0002, etc.)
Each function group consists of one or more functions. The functions are used to operate and parameterize the device. Numerical values can be entered resp. parameters selected and saved.
The functions in the “BASIC CONFIGURATION” function group include LANGUAGE, DISPLAY
DAMPING, CONTRAST LCD, etc. The procedure for changing the language of the user interface,
for example, is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
8
Select the block “USER INTERFACE”.
Select the group “CONTROL”.
Select the function group “BASIC CONFIGURATION”.
Select the function “LANGUAGE” (here you can set the language required).
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
2 Function Matrix
2.1.5
Codes identifying cells
Each cell (block, group, function group and function) in the function matrix has an individual,
unique code.
Blocks:
The code is a letter (A, B, C, etc.)
Groups:
The code consists of three letters (AAA, ABA, BAA, etc.).
The first letter matches the block code (i.e. each group in block A has a code starting with an A _ _;
the codes of the groups in block B start with a B _ _, etc.).
The other two letters are for identifying the group within the respective block.
Function groups:
The code consists of three digits (000, 001, 100, etc.).
Functions:
The code consists of four digits (0000, 0001, 0201, etc.).
The first three digits are the same as the code for the function group.
The last digit in the code is a counter for the functions in the function group, incrementing from 0
to 9 (e.g. function 0005 is the sixth function in group 000).
Block
Group
C
CAA
Function group
200
Functions
2000
2001
2002
A0001251
Endress+Hauser
9
2 Function Matrix
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
2.2
Function matrix PROline Promass 83
BLOCKS
MEASURED VARIABLES
GROUPS
A
→
(see P. 11)
↓
QUICK SETUP
Function
groups
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
SYSTEM UNITS
ACA
SPECIAL UNITS
AEA
B
→
Commissioning and application setups
C
→
CONTROL
CAA
MAIN LINE
CCA
ADDITIONAL LINE
CEA
INFORMATION LINE
CGA
TOTALIZER 1
DAA
TOTALIZER 2
DAB
TOTALIZER 3
DAC
HANDLING TOTALIZER
DJA
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1
ECA
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2
ECB
RELAY OUTPUT 1
EGA
RELAY OUTPUT 2
EGB
STATUS INPUT
FAA
CURRENT INPUT
FCA
HART
GAA
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
SENSOR DATA
GNA
DENSITY FUNCTIONS
HAA
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
HEA
SYSTEM
JAA
VERSION INFO
JCA
→
→
→
→
see P. 12
see P. 17
see P. 22
see P. 25
(see P. 25)
↓
USER INTERFACE
(see P. 34)
↓
TOTALIZER
D
→
(see P. 55)
↓
OUTPUT
E
→
(see P. 60)
↓
INPUT
F
→
(see P. 110)
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
see P. 35
see P. 39
see P. 43
see P. 49
see P. 56
see P. 56
see P. 56
see P. 59
see P. 61
see P. 61
see P. 61
see P. 73
see P. 73
see P. 100
see P. 100
see P. 111
see P. 114
↓
BASIC FUNCTION
G
→
(see P. 118)
↓
SPECIAL FUNCTION
H
→
(see P. 137)
↓
SUPERVISION
(see P. 172)
10
J
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
see P. 119
see P. 121
see P. 131
see P. 133
see P. 138
see P. 144
see P. 163
see P. 173
see P. 178
Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser
MEASURED
VARIABLES
A
Block
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(ACA) P. 17
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(AEA) P. 22
⇒
⇒
⇒
% BLACK LIQUOR
⇒
(0030) P. 15
TARGET MASS
FLOW
(0020) P. 13
(0000) P. 12
MASS FLOW
⇒
(0420) P. 20
UNIT DENSITY
⇒
ARBITRARY UNIT
TEXT ARB. MASS
⇒
⇒
(060) P. 22
(0600) P. 22
ADDITIONAL
CONF.
(042) P. 20
⇒
⇐
SPECIAL UNITS
⇒
⇒
CONFIGURATION
UNIT MASS FLOW
⇒
⇒
(040) P. 17
(0400) P. 17
ADDITIONAL
VALUES
(002) P. 13
⇒
⇐
SYSTEM UNITS
(000) P. 12
MAIN VALUES
Function
groups
CORR.
VOL.-FLOW
(0004) P. 12
(0005) P. 12
DENSITY
FACTOR ARB.
MASS
(0601) P. 22
UNIT REF.
DENSITY
(0421) P. 20
TEXT ARB. VOLUME
(0602) P. 23
UNIT TEMPERATURE
(0422) P. 21
UNIT VOLUME
FLOW
(0402) P. 18
UNIT MASS
(0401) P. 17
°API
(0033) P. 15
°BAUME
(0031) P. 15
FACTOR ARB.
VOLUME
(0603) P. 23
(0424) P. 21
UNIT LENGTH
(0403) P. 18
UNIT VOLUME
(0034) P. 16
°PLATO
% TARGET MASS TARGET VOLUME % TARGET VOLFLOW
FLOW
UME FLOW
(0021) P. 13
(0022) P. 13
(0023) P. 13
(0001) P. 12
VOLUME FLOW
(0036) P. 16
°BRIX
CARRIER MASS
FLOW
(0025) P. 14
TEXT ARB. DENSITY
(0606) P. 23
UNIT PRESSURE
(0426) P. 21
FACTOR ARB.
DENSITY
(0605) P. 23
UNIT CORR. VOL. UNIT CORR. VOLFLOW
UME
(0404) P. 19
(0405) P. 19
(0035) P. 16
°BALLING
CORR. TARGET
VOL. FLOW
(0024) P. 14
REFERENCE DEN- TEMPERATURE
SITY
(0006) P. 12
(0008) P. 12
Functions
TEXT ARB. CONCENTR.
(0606) P. 24
(0037) P. 16
OTHER
% CARRIER MASS
FLOW
(0026) P. 14
PRESSURE
FACTOR ARB.
CONCENTR.
(0607) P. 24
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
(0027) P. 14
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
(0028) P. 15
CORR. CARR.
VOLUME FLOW
(0029) P. 15
3
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
⇒
(AAA) P. 12
Groups
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Block MEASURED VARIABLES
11
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3.1
Group MEASURING VALUES
3.1.1
Function group MAIN VALUES
MEASURED VARIABLES
A
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
⇒
MAIN VALUES
000
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ MEASURING VALUES ➞ MAIN VALUES
!
Note!
• The engineering units of all the measured variables shown here can be set in the “SYSTEM UNITS” group.
• If the fluid in the pipe flows backwards, a negative sign prefixes the flow reading on the display.
MASS FLOW
(0000)
The currently measured mass flow appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
(e.g. 462.87 kg/h; −731.63 lb/min; etc.)
VOLUME FLOW
(0001)
The calculated volume flow appears on the display. The volume flow is derived from the
measured mass flow and the measured density of the fluid.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
(e.g. 5.5445 dm3/min; 1.4359 m3/h; −731.63 gal/d; etc.)
CORRECTED VOLUME
FLOW
(0004)
The calculated corrected volume flow appears on the display. The calculated corrected
volume flow is derived from the measured mass flow and the reference density of the
fluid (density at reference temperature, measured or fixed entry).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
(e.g. 1.3549 Nm3/h; 7.9846 scm/day; etc.)
DENSITY
(0005)
The currently measured density or its specific gravity appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit, corresponding to
0.1000...6.0000 kg/dm3
(e.g. 1.2345 kg/dm3; 993.5 kg/m3; 1.0015 SG_20 °C; etc.)
REFERENCE DENSITY
(0006)
The density of the fluid, at reference temperature, appears on the display.
The reference density can be calculated with the measured density or also specified via
the function FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY (6461), (see Page 125), or read in directly via
the current input.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit, corresponding to
0.1000...6.0000 kg/dm3
(e.g. 1.2345 kg/dm3; 993.5 kg/m3; 1.0015 SG_20 °C; etc.)
TEMPERATURE
(0008)
The currently measured temperature appears on the display.
User Interface:
max. 4-digit fixed-point number, including unit and sign
(e.g. −23.4 °C; 160.0 °F; 295.4 K; etc.)
PRESSURE
(0009)
The currently measured pressure appears on the display. This function is not available
unless “pressure” was selected in the ASSIGN CURRENT INPUT function (5200).
User Interface:
max. 4-digit fixed-point number, including unit and sign
(e.g. 50.0 barg; etc.)
12
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3.1.2
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Function group ADDITIONAL VALUES
MEASURED VARIABLES
A
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
⇒
MAIN VALUES
000
⇓
ADDITIONAL VALUES 002
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ MEASURING VALUES ➞ ADDITIONAL VALUES
TARGET MASS FLOW
(0020)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % MASS
2D or % MASS 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured mass flow of the target fluid. Target
fluid = carried material (e.g. lime powder).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
% TARGET MASS FLOW
(0021)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % MASS
2D or % MASS 3D
In this function, the currently measured mass flow of the target fluid is displayed as a %
(of the overall mass flow).
Target fluid = carried material (e.g. lime powder).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
TARGET VOLUME
FLOW
(0022)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % VOLUME 2D or % VOLUME 3D
In this function, the currently measured volume flow of the target fluid is displayed. Target fluid = carried material (e.g. lime powder).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
% TARGET VOLUME
FLOW
(0023)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % VOLUME 2D or % VOLUME 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured volume flow of the target fluid as a %
(of the overall volume flow).
Target fluid = carried material (e.g. lime powder).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Endress+Hauser
13
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ MEASURING VALUES ➞ ADDITIONAL VALUES
CORRECTED TARGET
VOLUME FLOW
(0024)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless % MASS / % VOLUME was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000), (see Page 138).
Use this function to display the currently measured corrected volume flow of the target
fluid. Target fluid = carried material (e.g. lime powder).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
CARRIER MASS FLOW
(0025)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the functionDENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % MASS
2D or % MASS 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured mass flow of the carrier fluid. Carrier
fluid = transporting liquid (e.g. water).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
% CARRIER MASS
FLOW
(0026)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % MASS
2D or % MASS 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured mass flow of the carrier fluid as a %
(of the overall mass flow).
Carrier fluid = transporting liquid (e.g. water).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
CARRIER VOLUME
FLOW
(0027)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % VOLUME 2D or % VOLUME 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured volume flow of the carrier fluid. Carrier fluid = transporting liquid (e.g. water).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
14
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ MEASURING VALUES ➞ ADDITIONAL VALUES
% CARRIER VOLUME
FLOW
(0028)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected:
• in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), see Page 138:
– % MASS / % VOLUME
– FLEXIBLE and in the function MODE (7021), see Page 141, the selection % VOLUME 2D or % VOLUME 3D
Use this function to display the currently measured volume flow of the carrier fluid as a %
(of the overall mass flow).
Carrier fluid = transporting liquid (e.g. water).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
CORRECTED CARRIER
VOLUME FLOW
(0029)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless % MASS / % VOLUME was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000), (see Page 138).
Use this function to display the currently measured corrected volume flow of the carrier
fluid. Carrier fluid = transporting liquid (e.g. water).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
% BLACK LIQUOR
(0030)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless %-BLACK LIQUOR was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in %-BLACK LIQUOR is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
°BAUME
(0031)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless °BAUME was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION
function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in °BAUME is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
°API
(0033)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless °API was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in °API is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
Endress+Hauser
15
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ MEASURING VALUES ➞ ADDITIONAL VALUES
°PLATO
(0034)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless °PLATO was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION
function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in °PLATO is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
°BALLING
(0035)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless °BALLING was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION
function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in °BALLING is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
°BRIX
(0036)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless °BRIX was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION
function (7000), (see Page 138).
The concentration in °BRIX is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
OTHER
(0037)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless FLEXIBEL was selected in the DENSITY FUNCTION
function (7000), (see Page 138) and this function is not available unless OTHER 2D oder
OTHER 3D was selected in the MODE function (7021), (see Page 138).
Displays the concentration in the unit, which was defined in the function TEXT ARBITRARY CONCENTRATION (0606), (see Page 24).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including units
16
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
3.2
Group SYSTEM UNITS
3.2.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
MEASURED VARIABLES
A
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
⇓
SYSTEM UNITS
ACA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
040
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SYSTEM UNITS ➞ CONFIGURATION
You can select the units for measured variables in this function group.
UNIT MASS FLOW
(0400)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the mass flow (mass/time).
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Relay switch points (limit value for mass flow, flow direction)
• Low flow cut off
Options:
Metric:
gram → g/s; g/min; g/h; g/day
Kilogramm → kg/s; kg/min; kg/h; kg/day
ton → t/s; t/min; t/h; t/day
US:
ounce → oz/s; oz/min; oz/h; oz/day
pound → lb/s; lb/min; lb/h; lb/day
ton → ton/s; ton/min; ton/h; ton/day
For arbitrary units (see function TEXT ARBITRARY MASS on Page 22)
_ _ _ _ → _ _ _ _/s; _ _ _ _/min; _ _ _ _/h; _ _ _ _/day
Factory setting:
Country-dependent (kg/h or US-lb/min)
!
Note!
If you defined a unit of mass in the ARBITRARY UNIT 060 function group (see Page 22)
the unit in question is shown here.
UNIT MASS
(0401)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the mass.
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Pulse value (e.g. kg/p)
Options:
Metric → g; kg; t
US → oz; lb; ton
For free selectable units → _ _ _ _
(see function TEXT ARBITRARY MASS on Page 22)
Factory setting:
Country-dependent (kg or US-lb)
!
Note!
• If you defined a unit of mass in the ARBITRARY UNIT 060 function group (see
Page 22) the unit in question is shown here.
• The unit of the totalizers is independent of your choice here. The unit for each totalizer is selected separately for the totalizer in question.
Endress+Hauser
17
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SYSTEM UNITS ➞ CONFIGURATION
UNIT VOLUME FLOW
(0402)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the volume flow (volume/time).
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Relay switch points (limit value for volume flow, flow direction)
• Low flow cut off
Options:
Metric:
Cubic centimeter → cm3/s; cm3/min; cm3/h; cm3/day
Cubic decimeter → dm3/s; dm3/min; dm3/h; dm3/day
Cubic meter → m3/s; m3/min; m3/h; m3/day
Milliliter → ml/s; ml/min; ml/h; ml/day
Liter → l/s; l/min; l/h; l/day
Hectoliter → hl/s; hl/min; hl/h; hl/day
Megaliter → Ml/s; Ml/min; Ml/h; Ml/day
US:
Cubic centimeter → cc/s; cc/min; cc/h; cc/day
Acre foot → af/s; af/min; af/h; af/day
Cubic foot → ft3/s; ft3/min; ft3/h; ft3/day
Fluid ounce → oz f/s; oz f/min; oz f/h; oz f/day
Gallon → gal/s; gal/min; gal/h; gal/day
Million gallon → Mgal/s; Mgal/min; Mgal/h; Mgal/day
Barrel (normal fluids: 31.5 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
Barrel (beer: 31.0 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
Barrel (petrochemicals: 42.0 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
Barrel (filling tanks: 55.0 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
Imperial
Gallon → gal/s; gal/min; gal/h; gal/day
Mega gallon → Mgal/s; Mgal/min; Mgal/h; Mgal/day
Barrel (beer: 36.0 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
Barrel (petrochemicals: 34.97 gal/bbl) → bbl/s; bbl/min; bbl/h; bbl/day
For free selectable units (see function TEXT ARBITRARY VOLUME on Page 23)
_ _ _ _ → _ _ _ _/s; _ _ _ _/min; _ _ _ _/h; _ _ _ _/day
Factory setting:
Country-dependent (m3/h or US-Mgal/day)
!
Note!
If you defined a unit of volume in the ARBITRARY UNIT 060 function group (see
Page 22) the unit in question is shown here.
UNIT VOLUME
(0403)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the volume.
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Pulse weighting (e.g. m3/p)
Options:
Metric → cm3; dm3; m3; ml; l; hl; Ml Mega
US → cc; af; ft3; oz f; gal; Mgal; bbl (normal fluids); bbl (beer);
bbl (petrochemicals); bbl (filling tanks)
Imperial → gal; Mgal; bbl (beer); bbl (petrochemicals)
For free selectable units → _ _ _ _ (see function TEXT ARBITRARY VOLUME on
Page 23)
Factory setting:
m3
!
Note!
• If you defined a unit of volume in the ARBITRARY UNIT 060 function group (see
Page 22) the unit in question is shown here.
• The unit of the totalizers is independent of your choice here. The unit for each totalizer is selected separately for the totalizer in question.
18
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SYSTEM UNITS ➞ CONFIGURATION
UNIT CORRECTED VOL- Use this function to select the unit for displaying the corrected volume flow (corrected
volume/time).
UME FLOW
(0404)
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Relay switch points (limit value for corrected volume flow, flow direction)
• Low flow cut off
Options:
Metric:
Nl/s
Nl/min
Nl/h
Nl/day
Nm3/s
Nm3/min
Nm3/h
Nm3/day
US:
Sm3/s;
Sm3/min;
Sm3/h;
Sm3/day
Scf/s;
Scf/min;
Scf/h;
Scf/day
Factory setting:
Nm3/h
UNIT CORRECTED VOL- Use this function to select the unit for displaying the corrected volume.
UME
(0405)
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Pulse value (e.g. Nm3/p)
Options:
Metric:
Nm3
Nl
US:
Sm3
Scf
Factory setting:
Nm3
!
Note!
The unit of the totalizers is independent of your choice here. The unit for each totalizer is
selected separately for the totalizer in question.
Endress+Hauser
19
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3.2.2
Function group ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION
MEASURED VARIABLES
A
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
⇓
SYSTEM UNITS
ACA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
040
⇓
ADDITIONAL CONF. 042
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SYSTEM UNITS ➞ ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION
UNIT DENSITY
(0420)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the fluid density.
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Relay switch points (limit value for density)
• Density response value for EPD
• Density adjustment value
Options:
Metric → g/cm3; g/cc; kg/dm3; kg/l; kg/m3; SD 4 °C, SD 15 °C, SD 20 °C;
SG 4 °C, SG 15 °C, SG 20 °C
US → lb/ft3; lb/gal; lb/bbl (normal fluids); lb/bbl (beer); lb/bbl (petrochemicals); lb/bbl
(filling tanks)
Imperial → lb/gal; lb/bbl (beer); lb/bbl (petrochemicals)
Factory setting:
kg/l
SD = Specific Density, SG = Specific Gravity
The specific density is the ratio of fluid density to water density (at water temperature =
4, 15, 20 °C).
UNIT REFERENCE DEN- Use this function to select the unit for displaying the reference density.
SITY
(0421)
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Relay switch points (limit value for density)
• Fixed reference density (for calculation of corrected volume flow)
• Current input (read in the reference density via current input)
Options:
Metric:
kg/Nm3
kg/Nl
US:
g/Scc
kg/Sm3
lb/Scf
Factory setting:
kg/Nl
20
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SYSTEM UNITS ➞ ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION
UNIT TEMPERATURE
(0422)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the temperature.
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Current outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Current input
• Relay switch points (limit value for temperature)
• Reference temperature (for corrected volume measurement with measured reference
density)
Options:
°C (Celsius)
K (Kelvin)
°F (Fahrenheit)
°R (Rankine)
Factory setting:
°C
UNIT LENGTH
(0424)
Use this function to select the unit for displaying the length of the nominal diameter.
The unit you select here is also valid for:
• Nominal diameter of sensor (function NOMINAL DIAMETER (6804) on Page 133)
Options:
MILLIMETER
INCH
Factory setting:
MILLIMETER
UNIT PRESSURE
(0426)
Use this function to select the unit for pressure.
The unit you select here is valid for:
• Specified pressure (see function PRESSURE (6501) on Page 130)
Options:
bar a
bar g
psi a
psi g
Factory setting:
bar g
Endress+Hauser
21
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3.3
Group SPECIAL UNITS
3.3.1
Function group ARBITRARY UNIT
MEASURED VARIABLES
A
⇒
MEASURING VALUES
AAA
⇓
SYSTEM UNITS
ACA
⇓
SPECIAL UNITS
AEA
⇒
ARBITRARY UNIT
060
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SPECIAL UNITS ➞ ARBITRARY UNIT
Use this function group to define a free selectable unit for mass, mass flow, volume, volume flow, density and concentration (optional).
TEXT ARBITRARY
MASS
(0600)
Use this function to enter a text for the selectable mass unit / mass flow unit. You define
only the text, the unit of time is provided from a choice of options (s, min, h, day).
User input:
xxxxxxx (max. 4 characters)
Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, +, −, decimal point, white space or underscore
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _” (No text)
Example:
If your text entry is “CENT” (for centner), this text string appears on the display complete
with the unit of time, e.g. “CENT/min”:
CENT = Mass (text input)
CENT / min = Mass flow as shown (on the display)
FACTOR ARBITRARY
MASS
(0601)
Use this function to define a quantity factor (without time) for the selectable mass-/ mass
flow unit. The mass unit on which this factor is based is one kilogram.
User input:
7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
1
Reference quantity:
kg
Example:
One centner is equivalent to 50 kg
User input: 0.02
22
→ 0.02 centner = 1 kg
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SPECIAL UNITS ➞ ARBITRARY UNIT
TEXT ARBITRARY VOLUME
(0602)
Use this function to enter a text for the selectable volume unit / volume flow unit. You
define only the text, the unit of time is provided from a choice of options (s, min, h, day).
User input:
xxxxxxx (max. 4 characters)
Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, +, −, decimal point, white space or underscore
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _” (No text)
Example:
If your text entry is “GLAS”, this text string appears on the display complete with the unit
of time, e.g. “GLAS/min”:
GLAS = Volume (text input)
GLAS / min = Volume flow as shown (on the display)
FACTOR ARBITRARY
VOLUME
(0603)
Use this function to define a quantity factor (without time) for the selectable unit. The
volume unit on which this factor is based is one liter.
User input:
7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
1
Reference quantity:
Liter
Example:
The volume of a glass is 0.5 l
User input: 2
TEXT ARBITRARY DENSITY
(0604)
→ 2 glasses = 1 liter
Use this function to enter a text for the selectable density unit.
User input:
xxxxxxx (max. 4 characters)
Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, +, −, decimal point, white space or underscore
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _” (No text)
Example:
Enter text “CE_L” (for centner per liter).
FACTOR ARBITRARY
DENSITY
(0605)
Use this function to define a quantity factor for the selectable density unit.
The density unit on which this factor is based is one kg/l.
User input:
7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
1
Reference quantity:
kg/l
Example:
One centner per liter is equivalent to 50 kg/l
User input: 0.02
Endress+Hauser
→ 0.02 centner/l = 1 kg/l
23
3 Block MEASURED VARIABLES
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
MEASURED VARIABLES ➞ SPECIAL UNITS ➞ ARBITRARY UNIT
TEXT ARBITRARY CON! Note!
CENTRATION
This function is not available unless the optional software package CONCENTRATION is
(0606)
installed.
Use this function to enter a text for the selectable concentration unit
(user-defined density unit).
User input:
xxxxxxx (max. 4 characters)
Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, +, −, decimal point, white space or underscore
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _” (No text)
Example:
Enter text “HFCS” (for High Fructose Corn Syrup).
FACTOR ARBITRARY
CONCENTRATION
(0607)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the optional software package CONCENTRATION is
installed and an option selected in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000), (see
Page 138).
Use this function to define a factor for the selectable concentration unit, see function
TEXT ARBITRARY CONCENTRATION (0606).
User input:
7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
1
Reference quantity:
Arbitrary concentration unit / %
Example:
The measured concentration 1% should be output as 0.01 HFCS value
User input → 0.01 [HFCS]
24
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4 Block QUICK SETUP
4
Block QUICK SETUP
Block
Group
Function
groups
⇒
⇒
QUICK SETUP
(B)
Functions
QUICK SETUP
COMMISSION
(1002) P. 25
⇒
QUICK SETUP
PULS. FLOW
(1003) P. 25
QUICK SETUP
GAS MEASUR.
(1004) P. 25
QUICK SETUP
BATCHING
(1005) P. 26
T-DAT
SAVE/LOAD
(1009) P. 26
Function description
QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP
COMMISSION
(1002)
Use this function to start the Setup menu for commissioning.
Options:
YES
NO
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
You will find a flowchart of the COMMISSIONING Setup menu on Page 27.
For more information on Setup menus, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline
Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en.
QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW
(1003)
Use this function to start the application-specific Setup menu for pulsating flow.
Options:
YES
NO
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
You will find a flowchart of the PULSATING FLOW Setup menu on Page 29.
For more information on Setup menus, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline
Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en.
QUICK SETUP GAS
MEASUREMENT
(1004)
Use this function to start the application specific Setup menu for the gas measurement.
Options:
YES
NO
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
You will find a flowchart of the GAS MEASUREMENT Setup menu on Page 31. For more
information on Setup menus, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline Promass
83, BA 059D/06/en.
Endress+Hauser
25
4 Block QUICK SETUP
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP BATCHING/DOSING
(1005)
!
Note!
This function is only available when the optional software package BATCHING is
installed.
Use this function to start the (optional) application specific Setup menu for batching.
Options:
YES
NO
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
You will find a flowchart of the BATCHING/DOSING Setup menu on Page 32.
For more information on Setup menus, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline
Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en.
T-DAT
SAVE/LOAD
(1009)
Use this function to save the parameter settings / configuration of the transmitter in a
transmitter DAT (T-DAT), or to load the parameter settings from the T-DAT into the
EEPROM (manual safety function).
Application examples:
• After commissioning, the current measuring point parameters can be saved to the TDAT as a backup.
• If the transmitter is replaced for some reason, the data from the T-DAT can be loaded
into the new transmitter (EEPROM).
Options:
CANCEL
SAVE (from EEPROM to T-DAT)
LOAD (from the T-DAT into EEPROM)
Factory setting:
CANCEL
!
Note!
• If the target device has an older software version, the message "TRANSM. SW-DAT" is
displayed during start-up. Then only the "SAVE" function is available.
• LOAD
This function is only possible if the target device has the same software version as, or a
more recent software version than, the source device.
• SAVE
This function is always available.
26
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4 Block QUICK SETUP
4.0.1
Setup Commissioning
ENDRESS+HAUSER
-
+
E
++
B
Quick Setup
QS 1002
Commission
E+
E
ESC
2000
Language
HOME-POSITION
Pre-setting
➀
Selection system units
Mass flow
Volume flow
Corr. Vol. flow
Density
Temperature
Unit 0400
Mass flow
Unit 0402
Volume flow
Unit 0404
Corr. Vol. flow
Unit 0420
Density
Unit 0422
Temperature
Unit 3001
Totalizer
Unit 3001
Totalizer
Corr. Vol. 6460
calculation
Quit
Density
Reference
Calculated
Unit 0421
Ref. Density
6462
Exp. Coeff. Lin
6461
6463
Exp. Coeff. SQR
Fix. Density
6464
Reference temp.
Yes
➁
Configure another system unit ?
➂
No
Selection output type
Current output n
Freq./Pulse output n
Quit
4200
Operation Mode
Frequency
Assign 4000
Current output
Pulse
Assign 4221
Pulse output
Assign 4201
Freq. output
4001
4222
4203
Pulse value
End value freq.
Current span
4002
4223
4204
Pulse width
Value F Low
Value 0/4 mA
4003
4225
4205
Value 20 mA
Meas. mode
Value F High
4004
4226
4206
Meas. mode
Output signal
Meas. mode
4005
4207
Output signal
Time constant
4006
4227
Failsafe mode
4208
Failsafe mode
Time constant
4209
Failsafe mode
Yes
p
Yes
Automatic parameterization of the display
r
Batching
Configure another output ?
No
Automatic configuration of display ?
No
q
Carrying out another Quick Setup ?
Pulsating flow
Gas measurement
No
Carrying out the selected Quick Setup
F06-83xxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-000
Endress+Hauser
27
4 Block QUICK SETUP
!
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Note!
• The display returns to the cell QUICK SETUP COMMISSION (1002) if you press the ESC key
combination during parameter interrogation. The stored parameters remain valid.
• The “Commissioning” Quick Setup must be carried out before one of the Quick Setups explained
below is run.
• ➀ Only units not yet configured in the current Setup are offered for selection in each
cycle. The unit for mass, volume and corrected volume is derived from the corresponding
flow unit.
• ➁ The “YES” option remains visible until all the units have been configured.
“NO” is the only option displayed when no further units are available.
• ➂ Only the outputs not yet configured in the current Setup are offered for selection in
each cycle.
• ➃ The “YES” option remains visible until all the outputs have been configured.
only option displayed when no further outputs are available.
“NO” is the
• ➄ The “automatic parameterization of the display” option contains the following basic
settings/factory settings:
YES: Main line = Mass flow; Additional line = Totalizer 1; Information line =
Operating/system conditions.
NO: The existing (selected) settings remain.
28
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4.0.2
4 Block QUICK SETUP
Pulsating flow Setup menu
ENDRESS+HAUSER
-
+
E
E
++
Quick Setup
B
ESC
HOME-POSITION
E+
1003
QS
Plusating Flow
Display 2002
damping
➀
Totalizer 1
Selection totalizer
Totalizer 3
Totalizer 2
Totalizer 3002
mode (DAA)
Totalizer 3002
mode (DAB)
➁
Yes
Quit
Totalizer 3002
mode (DAC)
Configure another totalizer ?
No
➂Selection of output type
Current output n
Freq.-/Puse output n
Quit
4200
Operation mode
Frequency
4004
4206
Measuring mode
Measuring mode
4005
4225
Measuring mode
4208
Time constant
Yes
Pulse
Time constant
➃
Configure another output ?
No
8005
Alarm delay
Assign 6400
LF-Cut off
On-value 6402
LF-Cut off
Off-value 6403
LF-Cut off
Pressure 6404
shock suppression
Quit
Quick Setup
F06-83xxxxx-19-xx-xx-de-00
!
Note!
• The display returns to the cell QS PULSATING FLOW (1003) if you press the ESC key combination during parameter interrogation.
• You can call up this Setup menu either directly from the “COMMISSIONING” Setup menu or
manually by means of the function QS PULSATING FLOW (1003).
• ➀ Only totalizers not yet configured in the current Setup are offered for selection
in each cycle.
• ➁ The “YES” option remains visible until all the totalizers have been parameterized.
“NO” is the only option displayed when no further totalizers are available.
Endress+Hauser
29
4 Block QUICK SETUP
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
• ➂ Only the outputs not yet configured in the current Quick Setup are offered for
selection in each cycle.
• ➃ The “YES” option remains visible until all the outputs have been parameterized.
“NO” is the only option displayed when no further outputs are available.
Settings for the Pulsating Flow Setup menu:
Fct. code
Function name
Suggested settings
Description
Call up through the function matrix:
B
1003
QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW
see P. 25
QS PULSATING FLOW
YES
see P. 25
Basic configuration:
2002
DISPLAY DAMPING
1 second
see P. 35
3002
TOTALIZER MODE (DAA)
BALANCE
see P. 57
3002
TOTALIZER MODE (DAB)
BALANCE
see P. 57
3002
TOTALIZER MODE (DAC)
BALANCE
see P. 57
Select the signal type: CURRENT OUTPUT (1...n)
4004
MEASURING MODE
PULSATING FLOW
see P. 67
4005
TIME CONSTANT
1 second
see P. 69
Select the signal type: FREQ./PULSE OUTPUT (1...2) / operating mode: FREQUENCY
4206
MEASURING MODE
PULSATING FLOW
see P. 78
4208
TIME CONSTANT
0 seconds
see P. 83
Select the signal type: FREQ./PULSE OUTPUT (1...2) / operating mode: PULSE
4225
MEASURING MODE
PULSATING FLOW
see P. 86
Other settings:
8005
ALARM DELAY
0 seconds
see P. 174
6400
ASSIGN
LF CUT OFF
MASS FLOW
see P. 121
6402
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT
OFF
Depends on diameter (DN [mm]):
– DN 1 = 0.02 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 2 = 0.10 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 4 = 0.45 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 8 = 2.0 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 15 = 6.5 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 15* = 18 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 25 = 18 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 25* = 45 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 40 = 45 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 40* = 70 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 50 = 70 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 80 = 180 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 100 = 350 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 150 = 650 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
– DN 250 = 1800 [kg/h] resp. [l/h]
see P. 121
*DN 15, 25, 40 “FB” = Full bore
versions Promass I
30
6403
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT
OFF
50%
see P. 121
6404
PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION
0s
see P. 122
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4 Block QUICK SETUP
4.0.3
Gas measurement Setup menu
ENDRESS+HAUSER
-
+
E
E
++
Quick Setup
B
ESC
HOME-POSITION
E+
QS
1004
Gas measurement
Assign
6400
Low flow cut off
On-value
6402
Low flow cut off
Off-value
6403
Low flow cut off
F06-83xxxxx-19-xx-xx-de-002
Settings for the Gas Measurement Setup menu:
Fct. code
Function name
Suggested settings
Description
Call up through the function matrix:
B
1004
QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP GAS MEASUR.
see P. 25
QUICK SETUP GAS MEASUR.
YES
see P. 25
No entry possible, the selection changes
automatically to OFF.
see P. 123
Basic configuration:
Endress+Hauser
6420
EMPTY PIPE DETECTION
6400
ASSIGN LOW FLOW CUT OFF For gas measurement we recommend
to switch off the low flow cut off.
OFF
see P. 121
6402
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT
OFF
If you don’t switch off the low flow cut off:
0.0000
see P. 121
6403
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT
OFF
If you don’t switch off the low flow cut off:
50%
see P. 121
31
4 Block QUICK SETUP
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4.0.4
Batching Setup menu
This Setup menu guides the user systematically through all the device functions that have to be
adjusted and configured for batching operation.
The Setup menu settings result in a (simple) one-stage batching process. The parameters for additional settings, e.g. for automatic compensation of after-runs or multi-stage batching must be manually set in the function matrix.
ENDRESS+HAUSER
-
+
++
E
E
B
Quick Setup
ESC
HOME-POSITION
E+
QS
1005
Batching/Dosing
ON-Value
6402
Low flow cut off
Flow
damping
6603
Pressure shock 6404
suppression
Batch
Selector
7200
Batch
Name
7201
Batch
Quantity
7203
Fix
7204
Compensation Quantity
Assign
Relay
Terminal No.
NO
Autom. Configuration
Display?
NO
Locked
PRESET
Batch quantity
7240
Access Customer
Automatic parameterization
of the display
Quit Quick Setup
!
32
F06-53xxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-002
YES
4780
Batch
Supervision?
YES
Max. Batch
Time
4700
Note!
• This Setup menu is only available when the optional software package BATCHING is installed in
the measuring device. By means of the order option, the software package can already be installed
in the measuring device when delivered from the factory or it can be ordered at a later date from
Endress + Hauser and installed as an optional software package.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4 Block QUICK SETUP
• The display returns to the function QUICK SETUP BATCHING (1005), if you press the ESC key
combination during parameter interrogation.
• At the start of the Setup, general device parameters are optimally configured for measuring signal
processing and output response.
• Then you can enter the specific batching parameters, starting with the options list “Batching
1...6”. In this way, by running through the Setup menu a number of times, up to six different
batching parameter sets (incl. special naming) can be created and called up as necessary.
• In order to enjoy full functionality, it is advisable to let the display parameters be set automatically.
This means that the lowest display line is parameterised as the batching menu. Softkeys are displayed which can be used to start or stop the batching process in the HOME position. In this way,
the measuring device can be fully deployed as a “batch controller”.
"
Caution!
By running the Setup, certain device parameters are optimally set for discontinuous operation.
Should the measuring device be used for continuous flow measurement at a later time, we recommend you to rerun the “COMMISSIONING” or the “PULSATING FLOW” Setup.
Settings for the Batching Setup menu:
Fct. code
Function name
Suggested settings
Description
Call up through the function matrix:
B
1005
QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP BATCHING
see P. 25
QUICK SETUP BATCHING
YES
see P. 26
Settings (functions with a grey background are set automatically):
6400
Endress+Hauser
ASSIGN LOW FLOW CUT OFF
MASS
see P. 121
see P. 121
6402
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF
Table value (see page 182)
6403
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF
50%
see P. 121
6603
FLOW DAMPING
0 seconds
see P. 131
6404
PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION
0 seconds
see P. 122
7200
BATCH SELECTOR
BATCH #1
see P. 144
7202
BATCH NAME
BATCH #1
see P. 144
7201
ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE
MASS
see P. 145
7203
BATCH QUANTITY
0
see P. 145
7204
FIX COMPENSATION QUANTITY
0
see P. 146
7205
COMPENSATION MODE
OFF
see P. 146
7208
BATCH STAGES
1
see P. 149
7209
INPUT FORMAT
Value input
see P. 149
4700
ASSIGN RELAY
BATCHING VALVE 1
see P. 100
see P. 106
4780
TERMINAL NUMBER
Output (display only)
7220
OPEN VALVE 1
0% or 0 [unit]
see P. 150
7240
MAXIMUM BATCHING TIME
0 seconds (Off)
see P. 155
7241
MINIMUM BATCHING QUANTITY
0% or 0 [unit]
see P. 156
7242
MAXIMUM BATCHING QUANTITY
0% or 0 [unit]
see P. 157
2200
ASSIGN (Main line)
BATCH NAME
see P. 39
2220
ASSIGN (Multiplex main line)
Off
see P. 41
2400
ASSIGN (Additional line)
BATCH DOWNWARDS
see P. 43
2420
ASSIGN (Multiplex additional line)
Off
see P. 46
2600
ASSIGN (Info line)
BATCHING KEYS
see P. 49
2620
ASSIGN (Multiplex info line)
Off
see P. 52
33
34
USER INTER⇒
FACE
(C)
Block
⇒
⇐
MAIN LINE
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(262) P. 52
MULTIPLEX
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(260) P. 49
(242) P. 46
MULTIPLEX
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(240) P. 43
(222) P. 41
MULTIPLEX
⇒
⇐
INFORMATION
LINE
(CGA) P. 49
⇒
⇒
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(220) P. 39
(204) P. 38
OPERATION
⇒
⇐
ADDITIONAL
LINE
(202) P. 37
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
⇐
UN-/LOCKING
⇒
⇐
(CCA) P. 39
⇒
BASIC CONFIG.
(200) P. 35
⇒
Function
groups
LANGUAGE
ASSIGN
(2620) P. 52
⇒
⇒
(2621) P. 53
100% VALUE
(2601) P. 50
100% VALUE
(2600) P. 49
ASSIGN
100% VALUE
(2421) P. 47
⇒
(2401) P. 44
(2420) P. 46
ASSIGN
(2400) P. 43
100% VALUE
⇒
ASSIGN
100% VALUE
(2201) P. 40
100% VALUE
DEF. PRIVATE
CODE
(2021) P. 37
DISPLAY
DAMPING
(2002) P. 35
(2221) P. 42
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
(2220) P. 41
ASSIGN
(2200) P. 39
ASSIGN
(2040) P. 38
TEST DISPLAY
(2020) P. 37
ACCESS CODE
(2000) P. 35
(2622) P. 54
FORMAT
(2602) P. 51
FORMAT
(2422) P. 48
FORMAT
(2402) P. 45
FORMAT
(2222) P. 42
FORMAT
(2202) P. 40
FORMAT
STATUS ACCESS
(2022) P. 37
CONTRAST LCD
(2003) P. 36
(2623) P. 54
DISPLAY MODE
(2603) P. 51
DISPLAY MODE
(2423) P. 48
DISPLAY MODE
(2403) P. 45
DISPLAY MODE
ACCESS CODE
COUNTER
(2023) P. 37
BACKLIGHT
(2004) P. 34
Functions
5
(CAA) P. 35
CONTROL
Groups
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Block USER INTERFACE
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
5.1
Group CONTROL
5.1.1
Function group BASIC CONFIGURATION
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇒
BASIC CONFIGURATION 200
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ CONTROL ➞ BASIC CONFIGURATION
LANGUAGE
(2000)
Use this function to select the language for all texts, parameters and messages shown on
the local display.
!
Note!
The displayed options depend on the available language group shown in the LANGUAGE
GROUP (8226) function.
Options:
Language group WEST EU / USA:
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANCAIS
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUESE
Language group EAST EU / SCAND:
ENGLISH
NORSK
SVENSKA
SUOMI
POLISH
RUSSIAN
CZECH
Language group ASIA:
ENGLISH
BAHASA INDONESIA
JAPANESE (syllabary)
Language group CHINA:
ENGLISH
CHINESE
Factory setting:
Country-dependent (see Page 182 ff.)
!
Note!
• If you press the OS keys at startup, the language defaults to “ENGLISH”.
• You can change the language group via the configuration software ToF Tool-Fieldtool
Package. Please do not hesitate to contact your E+H sales office if you have any questions.
DISPLAY DAMPING
(2002)
Use this function to enter a time constant defining how the display reacts to severely fluctuating flow variables, either very quickly (enter a low time constant) or with damping
(enter a high time constant).
User input:
0...100 seconds
Factory setting:
1s
!
Note!
Setting the time constant to zero seconds switches off damping.
Endress+Hauser
35
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ CONTROL ➞ BASIC CONFIGURATION
CONTRAST LCD
(2003)
Use this function to optimize display contrast to suit local operating conditions.
User input:
10...100%
Factory setting:
50%
BACKLIGHT
(2004)
Use this function to optimize the backlight to suit local operating conditions.
User input:
0...100%
!
Note!
Entering the value “0” means that the backlight is “switched off”. The display then no
longer emits any light, i.e. the display texts can no longer be read in the dark.
Factory setting:
50%
36
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5.1.2
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function group UN-/LOCKING
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇒
BASIC CONFIG.
200
⇓
UN-/LOCKING
202
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ CONTROL ➞ UN-/LOCKING
ACCESS CODE
(2020)
All data of the measuring system are protected against inadvertent change. Programming
is disabled and the settings cannot be changed until a code is entered in this function. If
you press the OS keys in any function, the measuring system automatically goes to this
function and the prompt to enter the code appears on the display (when programming is
disabled).
You can enable programming by entering your personal code (Factory setting = 83, see
function DEFINE PRIVATE CODE (2021)).
User input:
max. 4-digit number: 0 ...9999
!
Note!
• Programming is disabled if you do not press a key within 60 seconds following automatic return to the HOME position.
• You can also disable programming in this function by entering any number (other than
the defined private code).
• The Endress+Hauser service organization can be of assistance if you mislay your personal code.
DEFINE PRIVATE CODE
(2021)
Use this function to specify a personal code for enabling programming in the function
ACCESS CODE.
User input:
0...9999 (max. 4-digit number)
Factory setting:
83
!
Note!
• Programming is always enabled with the code “0”.
• Programming has to be enabled before this code can be changed.
When programming is disabled this function is not available, thus preventing others
from accessing your personal code.
STATUS ACCESS
(2022)
Use this function to check the access status for the function matrix.
User Interface:
ACCESS CUSTOMER (parameterization possible)
LOCKED (parameterization disabled)
ACCESS CODE
COUNTER
(2023)
Displays how often the customer code, service code or the digit “0” (code-free) has been
entered to gain access to the function matrix.
Display:
max. 7-digit number: 0...9999999
Factory setting:
0
Endress+Hauser
37
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5.1.3
Function group OPERATION
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇒
BASIC CONFIG.
200
⇓
UN-/LOCKING
202
⇓
OPERATION
204
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ CONTROL ➞ OPERATION
TEST DISPLAY
(2040)
Use this function to test the operability of the local display and its pixels.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
Test sequence:
1. Start the test by selecting ON.
2. All pixels of the main line, additional line and information line are darkened for minimum 0.75 second.
3. Main line, additional line and information line show an “8” in each field for minimum
0.75 seconds.
4. Main line, additional line and information line show a “0” in each field for minimum
0.75 seconds.
5. Main line, additional line and information line show nothing (blank display) for minimum 0.75 second.
When the test is completed, the local display returns to its initial state and the setting
changes to OFF.
38
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
5.2
Group MAIN LINE
5.2.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
220
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ MAIN LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
1
2
3
Esc
-
+
E
A0001253
1 = main line, 2 = additional line, 3 = information line
ASSIGN
(2200)
In this function, a value to be displayed is assigned to the main line (top line in the local
display). This value is displayed during normal operation.
Options (standard):
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH NAME (BATCH # 1“ or “BEER 330”, etc.)
BATCH QUANTITY (overall quantity to be batched)
BATCH COUNTER (batching processes carried out)
BATCH SUM (effective total batching quantity)
!
Note!
The options given in the BATCHING software package always refer to the batching
selected (“BATCH # 1”, “BATCH # 2”, etc.) in the BATCH SELECTOR function
(Page 144).
Example: If BATCH # 1 was selected in the BATCH SELECTOR function (7200), then
only the values from BATCH # 1 (batch name, batch quantity etc.) can be displayed.
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
39
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ MAIN LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
100% VALUE
(2201)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2200):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
FORMAT
(2202)
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point displayed for the reading in the main line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
40
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5.2.2
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function group MULTIPLEX
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
220
⇓
MULTIPLEX
222
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ MAIN LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
ASSIGN
(2220)
Use this function to define the second reading to be displayed in the main line alternately
(every 10 seconds) with the value defined in the ASSIGN function (2200).
Options (standard):
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
OFF
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH NAME (BATCH # 1“ or “BEER 330”, etc.)
BATCH QUANTITY (overall quantity to be batched)
BATCH COUNTER (batching processes carried out)
BATCH SUM (effective total batching quantity)
!
Note!
The options given in the BATCHING software package always refer to the batching
selected (“BATCH # 1”, “BATCH # 2”, etc.) in the BATCH SELECTOR function
(Page 144).
Example: If BATCH # 1 was selected in the BATCH SELECTOR function (7200), then
only the values from BATCH # 1 (batch name, batch quantity etc.) can be displayed.
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
41
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ MAIN LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
ASSIGN
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
100% VALUE
(2221)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function(2220):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
FORMAT
(2222)
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point for the
second value displayed in the main line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
42
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
5.3
Group ADDITIONAL LINE
5.3.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇓
ADDITIONAL LINE
CEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
240
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
1
2
3
Esc
-
+
E
A0001253
1 = main line, 2 = additional line, 3 = information line
ASSIGN
(2400)
In this function, a value to be displayed is assigned to the additional line (middle line in
the local display). This value is displayed during normal operation.
Options (standard):
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
TAG NAME
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
TOTALIZER 1
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH NAME (BATCH # 1“ or “BEER 330”, etc.)
BATCH QUANTITY (overall quantity to be batched)
BATCH COUNTER (batching processes carried out)
BATCH SUM (effective total batching quantity)
BATCH UPWARDS (batching progress upwards)
BATCH DOWNWARDS (batching progress downwards)
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
43
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN
(continued)
!
Note!
The options given in the BATCHING software package always refer to the batching
selected (“BATCH # 1”, “BATCH # 2”, etc.) in the BATCH SELECTOR function
(Page 144).
Example: If BATCH # 1 was selected in the BATCH SELECTOR function (7200), then
only the values from BATCH # 1 (batch name, batch quantity etc.) can be displayed.
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
100% VALUE
(2401)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2400):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
44
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
FORMAT
(2402)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless a number was selected in the ASSIGN function
(2400).
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point displayed for the reading in the additional line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
DISPLAY MODE
(2403)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2400):
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the format of the bar graph.
Options:
STANDARD
Simple bar graph with 25 / 50 / 75% gradations and integrated sign.
A0001258
SYMMETRY
Symmetrical bar graph for positive and negative directions of flow, with
–50 / 0 / +50% gradations and integrated sign..
A0001259
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Endress+Hauser
45
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5.3.2
Function group MULTIPLEX
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇓
ADDITIONAL LINE
CEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
240
⇓
MULTIPLEX
242
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
ASSIGN
(2420)
Use this function to define the second reading to be displayed in the additional line alternately (every 10 seconds) with the value defined in the function ASSIGN (2400).
Options (standard):
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
TAG NAME
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
OFF
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH NAME (BATCH # 1“ or “BEER 330”, etc.)
BATCH QUANTITY (overall quantity to be batched)
BATCH COUNTER (batching processes carried out)
BATCH SUM (effective total batching quantity)
BATCH UPWARDS (batching progress upwards)
BATCH DOWNWARDS (batching progress downwards)
!
Note!
The options given in the BATCHING software package always refer to the batching
selected (“BATCH # 1”, “BATCH # 2”, etc.) in the BATCH SELECTOR function
(Page 144).
Example: If BATCH # 1 was selected in the BATCH SELECTOR function (7200), then
only the values from BATCH # 1 (batch name, batch quantity etc.) can be displayed.
(continued on next page)
46
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
ASSIGN
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
!
Note!
Multiplex mode is suspended as soon as a fault / notice message is generated. The message in question appears on the display.
• Fault message (identified by a lightning icon):
– If “ON” was selected in the ACKNOWLEDGE FAULTS (8004) function, multiplex
mode is continued as soon as the fault has been acknowledged and is no longer
active.
– If “OFF” was selected in the ACKNOWLEDGE FAULTS (8004) function, multiplex
mode is continued as soon as the fault is no longer active.
• Notice message (identified by an exclamation mark):
– Multiplex mode is continued as soon as the notice message is no longer active.
100% VALUE
(2421)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2420):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
Endress+Hauser
47
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ ADDITIONAL LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
FORMAT
(2422)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless a number was selected in the ASSIGN function
(2420).
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point for the
second value displayed in the additional line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
DISPLAY MODE
(2423)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2420):
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the format of the bar graph.
Options:
STANDARD
Simple bar graph with 25 / 50 / 75% gradations and integrated sign.
A0001258
SYMMETRY
Symmetrical bar graph for positive and negative directions of flow, with
–50 / 0 / +50% gradations and integrated sign..
A0001259
Factory setting:
STANDARD
48
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
5.4
Group INFORMATION LINE
5.4.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇓
ADDITIONAL LINE
CEA
⇓
INFORMATION LINE
CGA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
260
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
1
2
3
Esc
-
+
E
A0001253
1 = main line, 2 = additional line, 3 = information line
ASSIGN
(2600)
In this function, a value to be displayed is assigned to the information line (bottom line in
the local display). This value is displayed during normal operation.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
TAG NAME
OPERATING/SYSTEM CONDITIONS
FLOW DIRECTION READING
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
OPERATING/SYSTEM CONDITIONS
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
49
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCHING KEYS (softkeys on the local display)
!
Note!
• If you select the BATCHING OPERATING KEYS, the multiplex display functionality
(function ASSIGN (2620), etc.) is not available in the information line.
• For information on the functional concept of the batching menu, please refer to the
Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, chapter Operation.
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
100% VALUE
(2601)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2600):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
50
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ CONFIGURATION
FORMAT
(2602)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless a number was selected in the ASSIGN function
(2600).
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point displayed for the reading in the information line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
DISPLAY MODE
(2603)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2600):
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the format of the bar graph.
Options:
STANDARD
Simple bar graph with 25 / 50 / 75% gradations and integrated sign.
A0001258
SYMMETRY
Symmetrical bar graph for positive and negative directions of flow, with
–50 / 0 / +50% gradations and integrated sign..
A0001259
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Endress+Hauser
51
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5.4.2
Function group MULTIPLEX
USER INTERFACE
C
⇒
CONTROL
CAA
⇓
MAIN LINE
CCA
⇓
ADDITIONAL LINE
CEA
⇓
INFORMATION LINE
CGA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
260
⇓
MULTIPLEX
262
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
!
Note!
If you select the BATCHING OPERATING KEYS in the function ASSIGN (2600), the multiplex display functionality is
not available in the information line.
ASSIGN
(2620)
Use this function to define the second reading to be displayed in the information line
alternately (every 10 seconds) with the value defined in the function ASSIGN (2600).
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
MASS FLOW IN %
VOLUME FLOW
VOLUME FLOW IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
ACTUAL CURRENT (1...3)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY (1...2)
TOTALIZER (1...3)
TAG NAME
OPERATING/SYSTEM CONDITIONS
DISPLAY FLOW DIRECTION
ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT
Factory setting:
OFF
(continued on next page)
52
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
ASSIGN
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
!
Note!
Multiplex mode is suspended as soon as a fault / notice message is generated. The message in question appears on the display.
• Fault message (identified by a lightning icon):
– If “ON” was selected in the ACKNOWLEDGE FAULTS (8004) function, multiplex
mode is continued as soon as the fault has been acknowledged and is no longer
active.
– If “OFF” was selected in the ACKNOWLEDGE FAULTS (8004) function, multiplex
mode is continued as soon as the fault is no longer active.
• Notice message (identified by an exclamation mark):
– Multiplex mode is continued as soon as the notice message is no longer active.
100% VALUE
(2621)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2620):
• MASS FLOW IN %
• VOLUME FLOW IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW IN %
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the flow value to be shown on the display as the 100% value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
10 kg/s, 10 l/s or 10 Nl/s
Endress+Hauser
53
5 Block USER INTERFACE
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
USER INTERFACE ➞ INFORMATION LINE ➞ MULTIPLEX
FORMAT
(2622)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless a number was selected in the ASSIGN function
(2620).
Use this function to define the maximum number of places after the decimal point for the
second value displayed in the information line.
Options:
XXXXX. - XXXX.X - XXX.XX - XX.XXX -X.XXXX
Factory setting:
X.XXXX
!
Note!
• Note that this setting only affects the reading as it appears on the display, it has no
influence on the accuracy of the system's calculations.
• The places after the decimal point as computed by the measuring device cannot always
be displayed, depending on this setting and the engineering unit. In such instances an
arrow appears on the display between the measuring value and the engineering unit
(e.g. 1.2 → kg/h), indicating that the measuring system is computing with more decimal places than can be shown on the display.
DISPLAY MODE
(2623)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the ASSIGN
function (2620):
• MASS FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
• CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW BARGRAPH IN %
Use this function to define the format of the bar graph.
Options:
STANDARD
Simple bar graph with 25 / 50 / 75% gradations and integrated sign.
A0001258
SYMMETRY
Symmetrical bar graph for positive and negative directions of flow, with
–50 / 0 / +50% gradations and integrated sign..
A0001259
Factory setting:
STANDARD
54
Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser
TOTALIZER
(D)
Block
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(DAB) P. 56
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(DAC) P. 56
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
(304) P. 58
OPERATION
⇒
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(300) P. 56
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
HANDLING
TOTALIZER
(DJA) P. 59
⇒
(304) P. 58
OPERATION
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(300) P. 56
⇒
⇐
TOTALIZER 3
⇒
(304) P. 58
OPERATION
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(300) P. 56
⇒
⇐
TOTALIZER 2
⇒
Function
groups
RESET ALL
TOTALIZERS
(3800) P. 59
(3040) P. 58
SUM
(3000) P. 56
ASSIGN
(3040) P. 58
SUM
(3000) P. 56
ASSIGN
(3040) P. 58
SUM
(3000) P. 56
ASSIGN
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
FAILSAFE ALL
TOTALIZERS
(3801) P. 59
(3041) P. 58
OVERFLOW
UNIT TOTALIZER
(3001) P. 57
(3041) P. 58
OVERFLOW
UNIT TOTALIZER
(3001) P. 57
(3041) P. 58
OVERFLOW
UNIT TOTALIZER
(3001) P. 57
TOTALIZER
MODE
(3002) P. 57
TOTALIZER
MODE
(3002) P. 57
TOTALIZER
MODE
(3002) P. 57
RESET TOTALIZER
(3003) P. 57
RESET TOTALIZER
(3003) P. 57
RESET TOTALIZER
(3003) P. 57
Functions
6
(DAA) P. 56
TOTALIZER 1
Groups
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
6 Block TOTALIZER
Block TOTALIZER
55
6 Block TOTALIZER
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
6.1
Group TOTALIZERS (1...3)
6.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
TOTALIZER
D
⇒
TOTALIZER 1
DAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
300
DAB
⇒
CONFIGURATION
300
DAC
⇒
CONFIGURATION
300
⇓
TOTALIZER 2
⇓
TOTALIZER 3
Function description
TOTALIZER ➞ TOTALIZERS (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
The function descriptions below apply to totalizers 1...3; the totalizers are independently configurable.
ASSIGN
(3000)
Use this function to assign a measured variable to the totalizer in question.
Options (standard):
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
!
Note!
• The totalizer is reset to “0” as soon as the selection is changed.
• If you select OFF in the function group CONFIGURATION of the totalizer in question,
only the ASSIGN (3000) function remains visible.
56
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
6 Block TOTALIZER
Function description
TOTALIZER ➞ TOTALIZERS (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
UNIT TOTALIZER
(3001)
Use this function to define the unit for the totalizer's measured variable, as selected
beforehand.
Options (for the MASS FLOW assignment):
Metric → g; kg; t
US → oz; lb; ton
Aribitary unit → _ _ _ _
Factory setting:
kg
Options (for the VOLUME FLOW assignment):
Metric → cm3; dm3; m3; ml; l; hl; Ml Mega
US → cc; af; ft3; oz f; gal; Mgal; bbl (normal fluids); bbl (beer);
bbl (petrochemicals); bbl (filling tanks)
Imperial → gal; Mgal; bbl (beer); bbl (petrochemicals)
Arbitrary unit → _ _ _ _
Factory setting:
m3
Options (for the CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW assignment):
Metric → Nl; Nm3
US → Sm3; Scf
Factory setting:
Nm3
TOTALIZER MODE
(3002)
Use this function to define how the flow components are to be totalized.
Options:
BALANCE
Positive and negative flow components. The positive and negative flow components are
balanced. In other words, net flow in the flow direction is registered.
FORWARD (only positive flow components)
REVERSE (only negative flow components)
Factory setting:
Totalizer 1 = BALANCE
Totalizer 2 = FORWARD
Totalizer 3 = REVERSE
RESET TOTALIZER
(3003)
Use this function to reset the sum and the overflow of the totalizer to zero.
Options:
NO
YES
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
If the device is equipped with a status input, with the appropriate configuration a reset for
each individual totalizer can also be triggered by a pulse (see the function ASSIGN
STATUS INPUT (5000) on Page 111).
Endress+Hauser
57
6 Block TOTALIZER
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
6.1.2
Function group OPERATION
TOTALIZER
D
⇒
TOTALIZER 1
DAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
300
⇓
⇓
TOTALIZER 2
DAB
⇒
OPERATION
304
CONFIGURATION
300
⇓
⇓
TOTALIZER 3
DAC
⇒
OPERATION
304
CONFIGURATION
300
⇓
OPERATION
304
Function description
TOTALIZER ➞ TOTALIZERS (1...3) ➞ OPERATION
The function descriptions below apply to totalizers 1...3; the totalizers are independently configurable.
SUM
(3040)
Use this function to view the total for the totalizer's measured variable aggregated since
measuring commenced. The value can be positive or negative, depending on the setting
selected in the function “TOTALIZER MODE” (3002), and the direction of flow.
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number, including sign and unit
(e.g. 15467.04 m3; −4925.631 kg)
!
Note!
• The effect of the setting in the “TOTALIZER MODE” function (see Page 57) is as follows:
– If the setting is “BALANCE”, the totalizer balances flow in the positive and negative
directions.
– If the setting is “FORWARD”, the totalizer registers only flow in the positive direction.
– If the setting is “REVERSE”, the totalizer registers only flow in the negative direction.
• The totalizer's response to faults is defined in the “FAILSAFE ALL
TOTALIZERS” function (3801), (see Page 59).
OVERFLOW
(3041)
Use this function to view the overflow for the totalizer aggregated since measuring commenced.
Total flow quantity is represented by a floating-point number consisting of max. 7 digits.
You can use this function to view higher numerical values (>9,999,999) as overflows.
The effective quantity is thus the total of OVERFLOW plus the value returned by the
SUM function.
Example:
Reading for 2 overflows: 2 · 107 kg (= 20,000,000 kg)
The value displayed in the function SUM = 196,845.7 kg
Effective total quantity = 20,196,845.7 kg
User interface:
integer with exponent, including sign and unit, e.g. 2 · 107 kg
58
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
6.2
6 Block TOTALIZER
Group HANDLING TOTALIZER
TOTALIZER
D
⇒
TOTALIZER 1
DAA
⇓
TOTALIZER 2
DAB
⇓
TOTALIZER 3
DAC
⇓
HANDLING TOTALIZER
TOTALIZER
RESET ALL
TOTALIZERS
(3800)
DJA
⇒
Handling totalizer functions
Function description
➞ HANDLING TOTALIZER ➞ Handling totalizer functions
Use this function to reset the totals (including all overflows) of the totalizers (1...3) to
“zero” (= RESET).
Options:
NO
YES
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
If the device has a status input and if it is appropriately configured, a reset for the totalizer
(1...3) can also be triggered by a pulse (see the ASSIGN STATUS INPUT function (5000)
on Page 111).
FAILSAFE ALL
TOTALIZERS
(3801)
Use this function to define the common response of all totalizers (1...3) in case of error.
Options:
STOP
The totalizer is paused until the fault is rectified.
ACTUAL VALUE
The totalizer continues to count based on the current flow measuring value. The fault is
ignored.
HOLD VALUE
The totalizer continues to count the flow that based on the last valid flow value (before
the fault occurred).
Factory setting:
STOP
Endress+Hauser
59
60
CURRENT
(EAA,-B,-C)
P. 61
OUTPUT
(E)
⇒
Groups
Block
(404) P. 71
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(430) P. 95
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
⇐
(474) P. 104
OPERATION
⇒
⇐
(478) P. 106
INFORMATION
⇒
⇒
RELAY
CONFIGURATION
⇒
⇒
(EGA, EGB) P. 100
(470) P. 100
(438) P. 99
INFORMATION
⇒
⇒
TERMINAL
NUMBER
(4780) P. 106
ACTUAL STATUS
⇒
RELAY
(4740) P. 104
(4700) P. 100
ASSIGN RELAY
TERMINAL
NUMBER
(4380) P. 99
⇒
⇒
⇒
SIM. SWITCH
POINT
(4741) P. 104
(4701) P. 101
VAL. SIM.
SWITCH PNT.
(4742) P. 105
SWITCH-ON
DELAY
(4702) P. 102
SIM. SWITCH
POINT
(4342) P. 98
ACTUAL STATUS
(4341) P. 98
ON-VALUE
VALUE SIM.
IMPULS
(4323) P. 96
SIMULATION
FREQ.
(4302) P. 95
SIMULATION
PULSE
(4322) P. 97
(4301) P. 95
ACTUAL FREQ.
(4703) P. 102
OFF-VALUE
VAL. SIM.
SWITCH PNT.
(4342) P. 98
VALUE SIMUL.
FREQ.
(4303) P. 96
SWITCH-ON
DELAY
(4243) P. 92
(4242) P. 92
ON-VALUE
ASSIGN STATUS
(4241) P. 91
(4223) P. 85
(4222) P. 84
(4221) P. 84
PULSE WIDTH
END VALUE
FREQ.
(4203) P. 75
PULSE VALUE
START VALUE
FREQ.
(4202) P. 75
VALUE SIM. CURRENT
(4042) P. 71
(4003) P. 66
(4002) P. 64
ASSIGN PULSE
FAILSAFE VALUE
(4211) P. 83
ASSIGN FREQUENCY
(4201) P. 74
SIMULATION
CURRENT
(4041) P. 71
VALUE 20 mA
VALUE 0_4 mA
OFF-VALUE
SWITCH-OFF
DELAY
(4704) P. 102
(4244) P. 93
MEASURING
MODE
(4206) P. 76
MEASURING
MODE
(4705) P. 103
SWITCH-OFF
DELAY
(4245) P. 93
TIME CONSTANT
(4706) P. 103
MEASURING
MODE
(4246) P. 94
OUTPUT SIGNAL FAILSAFE MODE
(4226) P. 87
(4227) P. 90
(4205) P. 76
(4204) P. 76
MEASURING
MODE
(4225) P. 86
VALUE F HIGH
TIME CONSTANT FAILSAFE MODE
(4005) P. 69
(4006) P. 70
VALUE F LOW
MEASURING
MODE
(4004) P. 67
Functions
TIME CONSTANT
(4247) P. 94
OUTPUT SIGNAL TIME CONSTANT FAILSAFE MODE
(4207) P. 80
(4208) P. 83
(4209) P. 83
7
OPERATION
⇒
OPERATION
MODE
(4200) P. 73
ACTUAL
CURRENT
(4040) P. 71
PULSE/FREQ.
CONFIGURATION
⇒
⇒
(ECA, ECB) P. 73
(420) P. 73
(408) P. 72
INFORMATION
⇒
⇐
TERMINAL
NUMBER
(4080) P. 72
⇒
⇐
OPERATION
⇒
CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN CURRENT
CURRENT SPAN
⇒
⇒
(400) P. 61
(4000) P. 61
(4001) P. 63
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
Function
groups
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Block OUTPUT
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
7.1
Group CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3)
7.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
400
EAB
⇒
CONFIGURATION
400
EAC
⇒
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN CURRENT
OUTPUT
(4000)
Use this function to assign a measured variable to the current output.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH UPWARDS (batching progress upwards)
BATCH DOWNWARDS (batching progress downwards)
!
Note!
• The current range selected (function CURRENT SPAN (4001)) corresponds to a batching rate of 0 – 100%, based on the batching quantity.
• The batching software automatically sets the values for 0/4 mA and 20 mA (function
VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) and VALUE 20 mA (4003)).
Example with upward batching:
Value 0/4 mA = 0 [unit]; value 20 mA = batching quantity [unit].
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
61
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN CURRENT
OUTPUT
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
!
Note!
If you select OFF, the only function shown in the CONFIGURATION function group is
this function, in other words ASSIGN CURRENT OUTPUT (4000).
62
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
CURRENT SPAN
(4001)
Use this function to define the current span. The selection specifies the operational range
and the lower and upper signal on alarm. For the current output 1 the option HART can
be defined additionally.
Options:
0–20 mA
4–20 mA
4–20 mA HART (only current output1)
4–20 mA NAMUR
4–20 mA HART NAMUR (only current output1)
4–20 mA US
4–20 mA HART US (only current output1)
0–20 mA (25 mA)
4–20 mA (25 mA)
4–20 mA (25 mA) HART (only current output1)
Factory setting:
4–20 mA HART NAMUR (current output 1)
4–20 mA NAMUR (current output 2...3)
!
Note!
• The option HART is only supported by the current output designated as current output
1 in the device software, (terminals 26 and 27, see function TERMINAL NUMBER
(4080) on Page 72).
• When switching the hardware from an active (factory setting) to a passive output signal select a current span of 4–20 mA (please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline
Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en)
Current span, operational range and signal on alarm level
2
1
3
1
2
3
0-20 mA
a
0 - 20.5 mA
0
22
4-20 mA
4 - 20.5 mA
2
22
4-20 mA NAMUR
3.8 - 20.5 mA
3.5
22.6
4-20 mA US
3.9 - 20.8 mA
3.75
22.6
0-20 mA (25 mA)
0 - 24 mA
0
25
4-20 mA (25 mA)
4 - 24 mA
2
25
F06-x3xxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-017
I[mA]
A = Current span
1 = Operational range (measuring information)
2 = Lower signal on alarm level
3 = Upper signal on alarm level
!
Note!
• If the measured value exceeds the measuring range (as defined in the functions VALUE
0_4 mA (4002) and VALUE 20 mA (4003)) a notice message is generated
(#351...354, current span).
• In case of a fault the behaviour of the current output is according to the selected option
in the function FAILSAFE MODE (4006). Change the error category in the function
ASSIGN SYSTEM ERROR (8000) to generate a fault message instead of a notice message.
Endress+Hauser
63
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
VALUE 0_4 mA
(4002)
Use this function to assign the 0/4 mA current a value.
The value can be higher or lower than the value assigned to 20 mA (function VALUE 20
mA (4003)). Positive and negative values are permissible, depending on the measured
variable in question (e.g. volume flow).
Example:
4 mA assigned value = 250 kg/h
20 mA assigned value = +750 kg/h
Calculated current value = 8 mA (at zero flow)
!
Note!
Note that values with different signs cannot be entered for 0/4 mA and 20 mA (function
4003) if SYMMETRY is the setting selected for the MEASURING MODE function (4004).
In this case, the message “INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears on the display.
Example for STANDARD measuring mode:
I [mA]
6
4
5
3
2
1
0
Q
A
A0001223
➀ = Initial value (0...20 mA)
➁ = Lower signal on alarm level:: depends on the setting in the function CURRENT SPAN
➂ = Initial value (4...20 mA): depends on the setting in the function CURRENT SPAN
➃ = Full scale value (0/4...20 mA): depends on the setting in the function CURRENT SPAN
➄ = Maximum current value: depends on the setting in the function CURRENT SPAN
➅ = Failsafe mode (upper signal on alarm level): depends on the setting in the functions CURRENT
SPAN (see Page 63) and FAILSAFE MODE, (see Page 59)
A = Measuring range
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, with sign
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 0.5 [kg/l] or −50 [°C]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group
– UNIT MASS FLOW (0400)
– UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402)
– UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW (0404)
– UNIT DENSITY (0420)
– UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421)
– UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422)
(see Page 17 till Page 21).
• If the option BATCH UPWARDS or BATCH DOWNWARDS (only possible with the
optional software package BATCHING) is selected in the function ASSIGN CURRENT
OUTPUT (4000), the value 0/4 mA is automatically specified in this function and cannot be edited.
"
Caution!
The current output responds differently, depending on the parameters set in the various
functions. Some examples of parameter settings and their effect on the current output are
given in the following section.
64
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
VALUE 0_4 mA
(continued)
Parameter setting example A:
1. VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) = equal to zero flow (e.g. –5 kg/h)
VALUE 20 mA (4003) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 10 kg/h) or
2. VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 100 kg/h)
VALUE 20 mA (4003) = equal to zero flow (e.g. –40 kg/h)
and
MEASURING MODE (4004) = STANDARD
When you enter the values for 0/4 mA and 20 mA, the working range of the measuring
device is defined. If the effective flow drops below or exceeds this working range (see
①), a fault/notice message is generated (#351-354, current range) and the current output responds in accordance with the parameter settings in the function FAILSAFE MODE
(4006).
1)
2)
mA
20
mA
20
4
4
Q
100
➀
Q
➀
-5 0
10
-40 0
➀
➀
A0001262
Parameter setting example B:
1. VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) = equal to zero flow (e.g. 0 kg/h)
VALUE 20 mA (4003) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 10 kg/h) or
2. VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 100 kg/h)
VALUE 20 mA (4003) = equal to zero flow (e.g. 0 kg/h)
and
MEASURING MODE (4004) = STANDARD
When you enter the values for 0/4 mA and 20 mA, the working range of the measuring
device is defined. In doing so, one of the two values is parameterised as zero flow
(e.g. 0 kg/h).
If the effective flow drops below or exceeds the value parameterised as the zero flow, no
fault/notice message is generated and the current output retains its value.
If the effective flow drops below or exceeds the other value, a fault/notice message is
generated (#351-354, current range) and the current output responds in accordance with
the parameter settings in the function FAILSAFE MODE (4006).
1)
mA
2)
20
mA
4
20
4
Q
100
➀
Q
0
10
0
➀
A0001264
Deliberately only one flow direction is output with this setting and flow values in the
other flow direction are suppressed.
Parameter setting example C:
MEASURING MODE (4004) = SYMMETRY
The current output signal is independent of the direction of flow (absolute amount of the
measured variable). The 0_4 mA value ➀ and the 20 mA value ➁ must have the same
sign (+ or −). The “20 mA VALUE” ➂ (e.g. backflow) corresponds to the mirrored 20
mA VALUE ➁ (e.g. flow).
mA
20
➂
4
0
➀
➁
Q
A0001249
ASSIGN RELAY (4700) = FLOW DIRECTION
With this setting e.g. the flow direction output via a switching contact can be made.
Parameter setting example D:
MEASURING MODE (4004) = PULSATING FLOW
Endress+Hauser
65
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
VALUE 20 mA
(4003)
Use this function to assign the 20 mA current a value.
The value can be higher or lower than the value assigned to 0/4 (function VALUE
0_4 mA (4002), see Page 64). Positive and negative values are permissible, depending on
the measured variable in question (e.g. mass flow).
Example:
4 mA assigned value = 250 kg/h
20 mA assigned value = +750 kg/h
Calculated current value = 8 mA (at zero flow)
!
Note!
Note that values with different signs cannot be entered for 0/4 mA (function 4002) and
20 mA, if SYMMETRY is the setting selected in the function MEASURING MODE
(4004). In this case, the message “INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, with sign
Factory setting:
Depends on nominal diameter [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the following functions
(see Page 17 to Page 21):
– UNIT MASS FLOW (0400)
– UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402)
– UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW (0404)
– UNIT DENSITY (0420)
– UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421)
– UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422)
• If the option BATCH UPWARDS or BATCH DOWNWARDS, (only possible with the
optional software package BATCHING) is selected in the function ASSIGN CURRENT
OUTPUT (4000), the value 20 mA is automatically specified in this function and cannot be edited.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT MASS FLOW (0400) (see
Page 17).
• A description of the selection STANDARD in the function MEASURING MODE is
given on Page 67.
!
Caution!
It is very important to read and comply with the information in the function VALUE
0_4 mA (under “A Caution”; Examples of parameter settings) on Page 64.
66
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
MEASURING MODE
(4004)
Use this function to define the measuring mode for the current output.
Options:
STANDARD
SYMMETRY
PULSATING FLOW
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Description of the individual options:
• STANDARD
The current output signal is proportional to the measured variable. The flow components outside the scaled measuring range (defined by the 0_4 mA VALUE ➀ and the
20 mA VALUE ➁) are taken into account as follows for signal output.
– If one of the values is defined as equal to the zero flow (e.g.VALUE 0_4 mA =
0 kg/h), no message is given if this value is exceeded or not achieved and the current output retains its value (in example 4 mA).
If the other value is exceeded or not achieved, the message “CURRENT OUTPUT
AT FULL SCALE VALUE” appears and the current output responds in accordance
with the parameter setting in the function FAILSAFE MODE (4006).
• If both values defined are not equal to the zero flow (for example
VALUE 0_4 mA = –10 kg/h, VALUE 20 mA = 10 kg/h), the message “CURRENT
OUTPUT AT FULL SCALE VALUE” appears if the measuring range is exceeded or not
achieved and the current output responds in accordance with the parameter settings in
the function FAILSAFE MODE (4006).
mA
20
4
0
➀
➁
Q
A0001248
• SYMMETRY
The current output signal is independent of the direction of flow (absolute amount of the
measured variable). The 0_4 mA VALUE ➀ and the 20 mA VALUE ➁ must have the
same sign (+ or −). The “20 mA VALUE” ➂ (e.g. backflow) corresponds to the mirrored
20 mA VALUE ➁ (e.g. flow).
mA
20
➂
!
4
0
➀
➁
Q
A0001249
Note!
• The direction of flow can be output via the configurable relay or status outputs.
• SYMMETRY cannot be selected unless the values in the VALUE 0_4 mA (4002) and
VALUE 20 mA (4003) functions have the same sign or one of the values is zero. If the
values have different signs, SYMMETRY cannot be selected and an “ASSIGNMENT
NOT POSSIBLE” message is displayed.
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
67
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
MEASURING MODE
(continued)
• PULSATING FLOW
If flow is characterized by severe fluctuations as is the case, for example, with reciprocating pumps, flow components outside the measuring range are buffered, balanced
and output after a maximum delay of 60 seconds. If the buffered data cannot be processed within approx. 60 seconds, a fault/notice message appears.
Under certain plant conditions, flow values can aggregate in the buffer, for example in
the case of prolonged and unwanted fluid backflow. However, this buffer is reset in all
relevant programming adjustments which affect the current output.
"
Caution!
If the option BATCH UPWARDS or BATCH DOWNWARDS is selected in the function
ASSIGN CURRENT OUTPUT (4000), the option is automatically specified and cannot be
edited.
Detailed explanations and
information
How the current output responds under the following postulated
conditions:
1. Defined measuring range (➀–➁): ➀ and ➁ have the same sign
mA
20
4
0
➀
➁
Q
A0001248
and the following flow behaviour:
Q
t
A0001265
• STANDARD
The current output signal is proportional to the measured variable. The flow components outside the scaled measuring range are not taken into account for signal output.
mA
t
A0001267
• SYMMETRY
The current output signal is independent of the direction of flow.
mA
t
A0001268
• PULSATING FLOW
Flow components outside the measuring range are buffered, balanced and output after
a maximum delay of 60 seconds.
mA
A
t
S
S=A
A0001269
(Continued on next page)
68
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
Detailed explanations and
information
(continued)
2. Defined measuring range (➀–➁): ➀ and ➁ do not have the same sign.
mA
20
➀
4
0
➁
0
Q
A0001272
3. Flow a (—) outside, b (- -) within the measuring range.
Q
➁
+
t
0
➀
+
a
b
A0001273
• STANDARD
a (—): The flow components outside the scaled measuring range cannot be taken into
account for signal output.
A fault message is generated (# 351...354, current range) and the current output
responds in accordance with the parameter settings in the function FAILSAFE MODE
(4006).
b (- -): The current output signal is proportional to the measured variable assigned.
mA
t
A0001274
• SYMMETRY
This option is not available under these circumstances, because the 0_4 mA value and
the 20 mA value have different signs.
• PULSATING FLOW
Flow components outside the measuring range are buffered, balanced and output after
a maximum delay of 60 seconds.
mA
A
t
S
S=A
A0001275
TIME CONSTANT
(4005)
Use this function to enter a time constant defining how the current output signal reacts to
severely fluctuating measured variables, either very quickly (enter a low time constant) or
with damping (enter a high time constant).
User input:
fixed-point number 0.01...100.00 s
Factory setting:
1.00 s
Endress+Hauser
69
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ CONFIGURATION
FAILSAFE MODE
(4006)
For safety reasons it is advisable to ensure that the current output assumes a predefined
state in the event of a fault. The setting you select here affects only the current output. It
has no effect on other outputs and the display (e.g. totalizers).
Options:
MIN. CURRENT
The current output adopts the value of the lower signal on alarm level (as defined in the
function CURRENT SPAN (4001), see Page 63.
MAX. CURRENT
The current output adopts the value of the upper signal on alarm level (as defined in the
function CURRENT SPAN (4001), see Page 63
HOLD VALUE (not recommended)
Measuring value output is based on the last measuring value saved before the error
occurred .
ACTUAL VALUE
Measured value output is based on the current flow measurement.
The fault is ignored .
Factory setting:
MIN. CURRENT
70
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
7.1.2
Function group OPERATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇒
OPERATION
404
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇒
OPERATION
404
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
OPERATION
404
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT (1...3) ➞ OPERATION
ACTUAL CURRENT
(4040)
Use this function to view the computed actual value of the output current.
User Interface:
0.00...25.00 mA
SIMULATION CURRENT
(4041)
Use this function to activate simulation of the current output.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The “SIMULATION CURRENT OUTPUT” message indicates that simulation is active.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress, i.e. the
current measuring values are output correctly via the other outputs.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
VALUE SIMULATION
CURRENT
(4042)
!
Note!
The function is not visible unless the function SIMULATION CURRENT (4041) is active
(= ON).
Use this function to define a freely selectable value (e.g. 12 mA) to be output at the current output. This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring device
itself.
User input:
0.00...25.00 mA
Factory setting:
0.00 mA
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
Endress+Hauser
71
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.1.3
Function group INFORMATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
OPERATION
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
404
⇓
EAB
⇒
INFORMATION
408
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
OPERATION
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
404
⇓
EAC
⇒
INFORMATION
408
CONFIGURATION
400
⇓
OPERATION
404
⇓
INFORMATION
408
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ CURRENT OUTPUT 1 ➞ INFORMATION
TERMINAL NUMBER
(4080)
72
Use this function to view the numbers of the terminals (in the connection compartment)
and the polarity used by the current output.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
7.2
Group PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2)
7.2.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
420
⇒
CONFIGURATION
420
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (GENERAL)
OPERATION MODE
(4200)
Use this function to configure the output as a pulse, frequency or status output. The functions available in this function group vary, depending on which option you select here.
Options:
PULSE
FREQUENCY
STATUS
Factory setting:
PULSE
Endress+Hauser
73
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
ASSIGN FREQUENCY
(4201)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to assign a measured variable to the frequency output.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
% TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
% TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
% CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
% BLACK LIQUOR
° BAUME
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED
DIAGNOSIS:
MASS FLOW DEVIATION
DENSITY DEVIATION
REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
!
Note!
If you select OFF, the only function shown in the CONFIGURATION function group is
this function, in other words ASSIGN FREQUENCY (4201).
74
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
START VALUE
FREQUENCY
(4202)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define an initial frequency for the frequency output.
You define the associated measured value of the measuring range in the VALUE F LOW
function (4204) described on Page 76.
User input:
5-digit fixed-point number: 0...10000 Hz
Factory setting:
0 Hz
Example:
• VALUE F LOW = 0 kg/h, initial frequency = 0 Hz:
i.e. a frequency of 0 Hz is output at a flow of 0 kg/h.
• VALUE F LOW = 1 kg/h, initial frequency = 10 Hz:
i.e. a frequency of 10 Hz is output at a flow of 1 kg/h.
END VALUE
FREQUENCY
(4203)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define a full scale frequency for the frequency output.
You define the associated measured value of the measuring range in the VALUE F HIGH
function (4205) described on Page 76.
User input:
5-digit fixed-point number 2...10000 Hz
Factory setting:
10000 Hz
Example:
• VALUE F HIGH = 10000 kg/h, full scale frequency = 10000 Hz:
i.e. a frequency of 10000 Hz is output at a flow of 10000 kg/h.
• VALUE F HIGH = 3600 kg/h, full scale frequency = 10000 Hz:
i.e. a frequency of 10000 Hz is output at a flow of 3600 kg/h.
!
Note!
In the FREQUENCY operating mode the output signal is symmetrical
(on/off ratio = 1:1). At low frequencies the pulse duration is limited to a
maximum of 10 seconds, i.e. the on/off ratio is no longer symmetrical.
Endress+Hauser
75
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
VALUE F LOW
(4204)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to assign a variable to the start value frequency (4202).
The value can be higher or lower than the value assigned to the VALUE F HIGH. Positive
and negative values are permissible, depending on the measured variable in question (e.g.
mass flow). You define a measuring range by defining the VALUE F LOW and VALUE F
HIGH values.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 0 [kg/l] or −50 [°C]
!
Note!
• For a graphic illustration see the VALUE F HIGH function (4205).
• Note that values with different signs cannot be entered for VALUE F LOW and VALUE
F HIGH, if SYMMETRY is the setting selected for the MEASURING MODE function
(4206). In this case the message “INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears on the display.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the UNIT MASS FLOW (0400),
UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402), UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW (0404), UNIT
DENSITY (0420), UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421) or
UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422) function (see P. 17 to P. 21).
VALUE F HIGH
(4205)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to assign a variable to the end value frequency (4203).
The value can be higher or lower than the value assigned to the VALUE F LOW. Positive
and negative values are permissible, depending on the measured variable in question (e.g.
mass flow). You define a measuring range by defining the VALUE F LOW and VALUE F
HIGH values.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
depends on diameter [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
Note that values with different signs cannot be entered for VALUE F LOW
and VALUE F HIGH, if SYMMETRY is the setting selected for the MEASURING MODE
function (4206). In this case the message “INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears on the
display.rresponds to the factory setting for the final value.
Freq.
125
100
0
➀ = Value f min
➁ = Value f max
➀
➁
Q
A0001279
(continued on next page)
76
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
VALUE F HIGH
(continued)
Parameter setting example 1:
1. VALUE F LOW (4204) = equal to zero flow (e.g. –5 kg/h)
VALUE F HIGH (4205) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 10 kg/h) or
2. VALUE F LOW (4204) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 100 kg/h)
VALUE F HIGH (4205) = equal to zero flow s (e.g. –40 kg/h)
and
MEASURING MODE (4206) = STANDARD
When you enter the values for VALUE F LOW and VALUE F HIGH the working range of
the measuring device is defined. If the effective flow drops below or exceeds this working
range (see ①), a fault or notice message is generated (#351-354, frequency area) and the
frequency output responds in accordance with the parameter settings in the function
FAILSAFE MODE (4209).
1)
2)
mA
20
mA
20
4
4
Q
100
➀
Q
➀
-5 0
10
-40 0
➀
➀
A0001262
Parameter setting example 2:
1. VALUE F LOW (4204) = equal to zero flow (e.g. 0 kg/h)
VALUE F HIGH (4205) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 10 kg/h) or
2. VALUE F LOW (4204) = not equal to zero flow (e.g. 100 kg/h)
VALUE F HIGH (4205) = equal to zero flow s (e.g. 0 v/h)
and
MEASURING MODE (4206) = STANDARD
When you enter the values for VALUE F LOW and VALUE F HIGH the working range of
the measuring device is defined. In doing so, one of the two values is parameterised as
zero flow (e.g. 0 kg/h).
If the effective flow drops below or exceeds the value parameterised as the zero flow, no
fault/notice message is generated and the frequency output retains its value.
If the effective flow drops below or exceeds the other value, a fault/notice message is
generated (#351-354, frequency area) and the frequency output responds in accordance
with the parameters set in the function FAILSAFE MODE (4209).
1)
mA
2)
20
mA
4
20
4
Q
100
➀
Q
0
10
0
➀
A0001264
Deliberately only one flow direction is output with this setting and flow values in the
other flow direction are suppressed.
Parameter setting example 3:
MEASURING MODE (4206) = SYMMETRY
The frequency output signal is independent of the direction of flow (absolute amount of
the measured variable). The VALUE F LOW ➀ and VALUE F HIGH ➁ must have the
same sign (+ or −). The “VALUE F HIGH” ➂ (e.g. backflow) corresponds to the mirrored
VALUE F HIGH ➁ (e.g. flow).
mA
20
➂
4
0
➀
➁
Q
A0001249
ASSIGN RELAY (4700) = FLOW DIRECTION
Flow direction output via a switching contact.
Parameter setting example 4:
MEASURING MODE (4206) = PULSATING FLOW
Endress+Hauser
77
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
MEASURING MODE
(4206)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define the measuring mode for the frequency output.
Options:
STANDARD
SYMMETRY
PULSATING FLOW
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Description of the individual options:
STANDARD
The frequency output signal is proportional to the measured variable. The flow components outside the scaled measuring range (defined by the VALUE F LOW ➀ and the
VALUE F HIGH ➁) are not taken into account for signal output.
– If one of the values is defined as equal to the zero flow (e.g. VALUE F LOW =
0 kg/h), no message is given if this value is exceeded or not achieved and the frequency output retains its value ( 0 Hz in the example). If the other value is
exceeded or not achieved, the message “FREQUENCY OUTPUT AT FULL SCALE
VALUE” appears and the frequency output responds in accordance with the parameter setting in the function FAILSAFE MODE (4209).
– If both values defined are not equal to the zero flow (for example VALUE F LOW =
–5 kg/h; VALUE F HIGH = 10 kg/h), the message “FREQUENCY OUTPUT AT
FULL SCALE VALUE” appears if the measuring range is exceeded or not achieved
and the frequency output responds in accordance with the parameter settings in the
function FAILSAFE MODE (4209)...
Freq.
125
100
0
➀
Q
➁
A0001279
SYMMETRY
The frequency output signal is independent of the direction of flow (absolute amount of
the measured variable). The VALUE F LOW ➀ and the VALUE F HIGH ➁ must have the
same sign (+ or −). The VALUE F HIGH ➂ (e.g. backflow) corresponds to the mirrored
VALUE F HIGH ➁ (e.g. flow).
Freq.
125
100
0
➂
!
Q
➀
➁
A0001280
Note!
• The direction of flow can be output via the configurable relay or status outputs.
• SYMMETRY cannot be selected unless the values in the VALUE F LOW (4204) and
VALUE F HIGH (4205) functions have the same sign or one of the values is zero. If the
values have different signs, SYMMETRY cannot be selected and an “ASSIGNMENT
NOT POSSIBLE” message is displayed.
(continued on next page)
78
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
MEASURING MODE
(continued)
Endress+Hauser
PULSATING FLOW
If flow is characterized by severe fluctuations as is the case, for example, with reciprocating pumps, flow components outside the measuring range are buffered, balanced and
output after a maximum delay of 60 seconds. If the buffered data cannot be processed
within approx. 60 seconds, a fault/notice message appears.
Under certain plant conditions, flow values can aggregate in the buffer, for example in the
case of prolonged and unwanted fluid backflow. However, this buffer is reset in all relevant programming adjustments which affect the frequency output.
79
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(4207)
! Note!
Function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the
OPERATION MODE (4200) function.
For selecting the output configuration of the frequency output.
Options:
0 = PASSIVE - POSITIVE
1 = PASSIVE - NEGATIVE
2 = ACTIVE - POSITIVE
3 = ACTIVE - NEGATIVE
Factory setting: PASSIVE - POSITIVE
Explanation
• PASSIVE = power is supplied to the frequency output by means of an external power
supply.
• ACTIVE = power is supplied to the frequency output by means of the device-internal
power supply.
Configuring the output signal level (POSITIVE or NEGATIVE) determines the quiescent
behaviour (at zero flow) of the frequency output.
The internal transistor is activated as follows:
• If POSITIVE is selected, the internal transistor is activated with a positive signal level.
• If NEGATIVE is selected, the internal transistor is activated with a negative signal
level (0 V).
! Note!
With the passive output configuration, the output signal levels of the frequency output
depend on the external circuit (see examples).
Example for passive output circuit (PASSIVE)
If PASSIVE is selected, the frequency output is configured as an open collector.
➀
1 5 7 8 3
+
➁
=
Umax = 30 V DC
-
A0001225
m = Open Collector, n = External power supply
! Note!
For continuous currents up to 25 mA (Imax = 250 mA / 20 ms).
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-POSITIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-up resistance.
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is 0 V.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
m
o
n
U (V)
p
t
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-000
m = Open Collector, n = Pull-Up-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “POSITIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from 0 V to a
positive voltage level.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-004
(continued on next page)
80
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(continued)
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-POSITIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-down resistance. In the quiescent state (at
zero flow), a positive voltage level is measured via the pull-down resistance.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
U (V)
m
o
t
p
n
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-001
m = Open Collector
n = Pull-Down-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “POSITIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-006
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-NEGATIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-up resistance. In the quiescent state (at zero
flow), the output signal level at the terminals is at a positive voltage level.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
m
o
n
U (V)
p
t
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-002
m = Open Collector
n = Pull-Up-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “NEGATIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-006
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
81
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(continued)
Example for active output circuit (ACTIVE):
With an active circuit, the internal power supply is 24 V.
The frequency output is short-circuit proof.
À
+
=
-
Á
1 5 7 8 3
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-003
m = 24 V DC internal power supply
n = Short-circuit proof output
The signal levels are to be seen as analogous to the passive circuit.
The following applies for the output configuration ACTIVE-POSITIVE:
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is 0 V.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-015
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from 0 V to a
positive voltage level.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-009
The following applies for the output configuration ACTIVE-NEGATIVE:
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is at a positive
voltage level.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-014
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-010
82
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (FREQUENCY)
TIME CONSTANT
(4208)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to enter a time constant defining how the frequency output signal reacts
to severely fluctuating measured variables, either very quickly (enter a low time constant)
or with damping (enter a high time constant).
User input:
fixed-point number: 0.00...100.00 s
Factory setting:
0.00 s
FAILSAFE MODE
(4209)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
For safety reasons it is advisable to ensure that the frequency output assumes a predefined
state in the event of a fault. The setting you select here affects only the frequency output.
It has no effect on other outputs and the display (e.g. totalizers).
Options:
FALLBACK VALUE
Output is 0 Hz.
FAILSAFE VALUE
Output is the frequency specified in the FAILSAFE VALUE function (4211).
HOLD VALUE
Measuring value output is based on the last measured value saved before the error
occurred.
ACTUAL VALUE
Measuring value output is based on the current flow measurement.
The fault is ignored.
Factory setting:
FALLBACK VALUE
FAILSAFE VALUE
(4211)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless FREQUENCY was selected in the
OPERATION MODE function (4200) and FAILSAFE VALUE was selected
in the FAILSAFE MODE function (4209).
Use this function to define the frequency that the measuring device outputs in the event
of an error.
User input:
max. 5-digit number: 0...12500 Hz
Factory setting:
12500 Hz
Endress+Hauser
83
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
ASSIGN PULSE
(4221)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to assign a measured variable to the pulse output.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
!
Note!
If you select OFF, the only function shown in the CONFIGURATION function group is
this function, in other words ASSIGN PULSE (4221).
PULSE VALUE
(4222)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define the flow at which a pulse is triggered.
These pulses can be totalled by an external totalizer, and the total flow quantity since
measuring started can be registered in this way.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
depends on nominal diameter and country,
[value] [kg or lb] / impuls;
corresponds to the factory setting for the pulse value (see Page 182 ff.).
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the UNIT MASS (0401), UNIT VOLUME (0403) or
UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME (0405) function (see Page 17 or Page 19).
84
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
PULSE WIDTH
(4223)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to enter the pulse width of the output pulse.
User input:
0.05...2000 ms
Factory setting:
100 ms
Pulse output is always with the pulse width (B) entered in this function.
The pauses (P) between the individual pulses are automatically configured. However,
they must at least correspond to the pulse width (B = P).
B
B
B= P
B< P
P
P
A0001233
B = Pulse width entered (the illustration applies to positive pulses)
P = Pauses between the individual pulses
!
Note!
When entering the pulse width, select a value that can still be processed by an external
totalizer (e.g. mechanical totalizer, PLC, etc.).
"
Caution!
If the pulse number or frequency resulting from the pulse value entered (see function
PULSE VALUE (4222) on Page 84) and from the current flow is too large to maintain the
pulse width selected (the time interval is smaller than the pulse width B entered), a system error message is generated (# 359...362, pulse buffer) after approx. 5 seconds
buffer/balance time.
Endress+Hauser
85
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
MEASURING MODE
(4225)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define the measuring mode for the pulse output.
Options:
STANDARD
Only positive flow components are totalled. Negative components are not taken into
account.
SYMMETRY
Positive and negative flow components are taken into account.
!
Note!
The direction of flow can be output via the relay output.
PULSATING FLOW
If flow is characterized by severe fluctuations as is the case, for example, with reciprocating pumps, the positive and negative flow components are totalled, with the signs taken
into account (e.g. −10 l and +25 l = 15 l).
Flow components outside the maximum pulse number per second (value/width) are
buffered, balanced and output after a maximum delay of 60 seconds. If the buffered data
cannot be processed within approx. 60 seconds, a fault/notice message appears.
Under certain plant conditions, flow values can aggregate in the buffer, for example in the
case of prolonged and unwanted fluid backflow. However, this buffer is reset in all relevant programming adjustments which affect the pulse output.
STANDARD REVERSE
Only negative flow components are totaled. Positive components are not taken into
account.
Factory setting:
STANDARD
86
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(4226)
! Note!
Function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE (4200) function.
For selecting the output configuration of the pulse output.
Options:
0 = PASSIVE - POSITIVE
1 = PASSIVE - NEGATIVE
2 = ACTIVE - POSITIVE
3 = ACTIVE - NEGATIVE
Factory setting: PASSIVE - POSITIVE
Explanation
• PASSIVE = power is supplied to the pulse output by means of an external power
supply.
• ACTIVE = power is supplied to the pulse output by means of the device-internal
power supply.
Configuring the output signal level (POSITIVE or NEGATIVE) determines the quiescent
behaviour (at zero flow) of the pulse output.
The internal transistor is activated as follows:
• If POSITIVE is selected, the internal transistor is activated with a positive signal level.
• If NEGATIVE is selected, the internal transistor is activated with a negative signal
level (0 V).
! Note!
With the passive output configuration, the output signal levels of the pulse output depend
on the external circuit (see examples).
Example for passive output circuit (PASSIVE)
If PASSIVE is selected, the pulse output is configured as an open collector.
➀
1 5 7 8 3
+
➁
=
Umax = 30 V DC
-
A0001225
m = Open Collector, n = External power supply
! Note!
For continuous currents up to 25 mA (Imax = 250 mA / 20 ms).
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-POSITIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-up resistance.
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is 0 V.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
m
o
n
U (V)
p
t
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-000
m = Open Collector, n = Pull-Up-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “POSITIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from 0 V to a
positive voltage level.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-004
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
87
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(continued)
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-POSITIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-down resistance. In the quiescent state (at
zero flow), a positive voltage level is measured via the pull-down resistance.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
U (V)
m
o
t
p
n
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-001
m = Open Collector
n = Pull-Down-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “POSITIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-006
Example for output configuration PASSIVE-NEGATIVE:
Output configuration with an external pull-up resistance. In the quiescent state (at zero
flow), the output signal level at the terminals is at a positive voltage level.
+ Umax = 30 V DC
U (V)
m
o
n
U (V)
p
t
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-002
m = Open Collector
n = Pull-Up-Resistance
o = Transistor activation in “NEGATIVE” quiescent state (at zero flow)
p = Output signal level in quiescent state (at zero flow)
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U (V)
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-006
(continued on next page)
88
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(continued)
Example for active output circuit (ACTIVE):
With an active circuit, the internal power supply is 24 V.
The pulse output is short-circuit proof.
À
+
=
-
Á
1 5 7 8 3
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-003
m = 24 V DC internal power supply
n = Short-circuit proof output
The signal levels are to be seen as analogous to the passive circuit.
The following applies for the output configuration ACTIVE-POSITIVE:
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is 0 V.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-015
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from 0 V to a
positive voltage level.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-009
The following applies for the output configuration ACTIVE-NEGATIVE:
In the quiescent state (at zero flow), the output signal level at the terminals is at a positive
voltage level.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-014
In the operating status (flow present), the output signal level changes from a positive
voltage level to 0 V.
U
24 V
0V
t
F06-xxxxxxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-010
Endress+Hauser
89
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (PULSE)
FAILSAFE MODE
(4227)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
For safety reasons it is advisable to ensure that the pulse output assumes a predefined
state in the event of a fault. The setting you select here affects only the pulse output. It
has no effect on other outputs and the display (e.g. totalizers).
Options:
FALLBACK VALUE
Output is 0 pulse.
HOLD VALUE
Measured value output is based on the last measured value saved before the error
occurred.
ACTUAL VALUE
Measured value output is based on the current flow measurement.
The fault is ignored.
Factory setting:
FALLBACK VALUE
90
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (STATUS)
ASSIGN STATUS
(4241)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the STATUS setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE (4200) function.
Use this function to assign a switching function to the status output.
Options:
OFF
ON (operation)
FAULT MESSAGE
NOTICE MESSAGE
FAULT MESSAGE or NOTICE MESSAGE
EMPTY PIPE DETECTION (only with active function)
FLOW DIRECTION
MASS FLOW LIMIT VALUE
VOLUME FLOW LIMIT VALUE
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW LIMIT VALUE
DENSITY LIMIT VALUE
REFERENCE DENSITY LIMIT VALUE
TEMPERATURE LIMIT VALUE
TOTALIZER 1 LIMIT VALUE
TOTALIZER 2 LIMIT VALUE
TOTALIZER 3 LIMIT VALUE
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH RUNNING
> BATCH TIME
>< BATCH QUANTITIES (< min. / > max. batching quantity)
PROGRESS NOTE (batching end approaching)
!
Note!
The only options available are the monitoring functions (7240...7243) which have a
value not equal to zero (max. 3).
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
LIMIT TARGET MASS FLOW
LIMIT TARGET % MASS PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT TARGET VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT TARGET % VOLUME PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER MASS FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER % MASS PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER % VOLUME PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT % BLACK LIQUOR
LIMIT °BAUME > 1
LIMIT °BAUME < 1
LIMIT °API
LIMIT °PLATO
LIMIT °BALLING
LIMIT °BRIX
LIMIT OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
LIMIT MASS FLOW DEVIATION
LIMIT DENSITY DEVIATION
LIMIT REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
LIMIT TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
LIMIT TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
LIMIT ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
(continued on next page)
Endress+Hauser
91
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (STATUS)
ASSIGN STATUS
(continued)
Factory setting:
FAULT MESSAGE
!
Note!
• The behaviour of the status output is a normally closed behaviour, in other words the
output is closed (transistor conductive) when normal, error-free measuring is in
progress.
– “normal, error-free” operation: Flow direction = forwards; limit values = not
exceeded; no empty or partiallly filled measuring tube (EPD/OED); no fault or
notice message present.
– Switching responce like relay output, see Page 107
• If you select OFF, the only function shown in the CONFIGURATION function group is
this function, in other words ASSIGN STATUS (4241).
• Switching responce like relay output, see Page 100.
ON-VALUE
(4242)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless STATUS was selected in the OPERATION MODE
function (4200) and LIMIT VALUE or FLOW DIRECTION was selected in the ASSIGN
STATUS function (4241).
Use this function to assign a value to the switch-on point (activation of the status output).
The value can be higher or lower than the switch-off point. Positive or negative values
are permissible, depending on the measured variable in question (e.g. mass flow, totalizer
reading).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
• If SYMMETRY is selected in the function MEASURING MODE (4246) and values with
different signs are entered for the switch-on and switch-off points, the notice message
“INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears.
• Only the switch-on point is available for flow direction output (no switch-off point). If
you enter a value not equal to the zero flow (e.g. 5 ), the difference between the zero
flow and the value entered corresponds to half the switchover hysteresis.
SWITCH-ON DELAY
(4243)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless STATUS was selected in the OPERATION MODE
function (4200) and LIMIT VALUE or FLOW DIRECTION was selected in the ASSIGN
STATUS function (4241).
Use this function to define a delay (0...100 seconds) for the switch-on (i.e. signal changes
from “not conductive” to “conductive”) of the status output. The delay starts when the
limit value is reached. The status output does switch when the delay has timed out and
the switch on condition has been valid over the delay time.
User input:
fixed-point number: 0.0...100.0 s
Factory setting:
0.0 s
92
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (STATUS)
OFF-VALUE
(4244)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless STATUS was selected in the OPERATION MODE
function (4200) and a LIMIT VALUE was selected in the ASSIGN STATUS function
(4241).
Use this function to assign a value to the switch-off point (deactivation of the status output). The value can be higher or lower than the switch-on point. Positive and negative
values are permissible, depending on the measured variable in question (e.g. mass flow,
totalizer reading).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402) or
UNIT MASS FLOW (0400).
• If SYMMETRY is selected in the function MEASURING MODE (4246) and values with
different signs are entered for the switch-on and switch-off points, the notice message
“INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears.
SWITCH-OFF DELAY
(4245)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the STATUS setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to define a delay (0...100 seconds) for the switch-off (i.e. signal changes
from “conductive” to “not conductive”) of the status output. The delay starts when the
limit value is reached. The status output does switch when the delay has timed out and
the switch off condition has been valid over the delay time.
User input:
fixed-point number: 0.0...100.0 s
Factory setting:
0.0 s
Endress+Hauser
93
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION (STATUS)
MEASURING MODE
(4246)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless STATUS was selected in the OPERATION MODE
function(4200) and the status output was assigned a limit value.
Use this function to define the measuring mode for the status output.
Options:
STANDARD
The status output signal switches at the defined switch points.
SYMMETRY
The status output signal switches at the defined switch points, irrespective of the sign. If
you define a switch point with a positive sign, the status output signal switches as soon as
the value is reached in the negative direction (negative sign), (see illustration).
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Example for the SYMMETRY measuring mode:
Switch-on point Q = 4, Switch-off point Q = 10
➀ = Status output switched on (conductive)
➁ = Status output switched off (non-conductive)
Q
10
4
0
t
-4
- 10
➀
➁
!
➀
➁
➀
A0001247
Note!
• SYMMETRY cannot be selected unless the values in the ON-VALUE (4242) and OFFVALUE (4244) functions have the same sign or one of the values is zero.
• If the values have different signs, SYMMETRY cannot be selected and an “ASSIGNMENT NOT POSSIBLE” message is displayed.
TIME CONSTANT
(4247)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the STATUS setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to enter a time constant defining how the measuring signal reacts to
severely fluctuating measured variables, either very quickly (enter a low time constant) or
with damping (enter a high time constant). Damping acts on the measuring signal before
the switch status changes, and consequently before switch-on or switch-off delay is activated. The purpose of damping, therefore, is to prevent the status output changing state
continuously in response to fluctuations in flow.
User input:
fixed-point number 0.00...100.00 s
Factory setting:
0.00 s
94
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
7.2.2
Function group OPERATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
420
⇓
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
⇒
OPERATION
430
CONFIGURATION
420
⇓
OPERATION
430
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION (FREQUENCY)
ACTUAL FREQUENCY
(4301)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to view the computed actual value of the output frequency.
User Interface:
0...12500 Hz
SIMULATION FREQUENCY
(4302)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FREQUENCY setting was selected in the OPERATION MODE function (4200).
Use this function to activate simulation of the frequency output.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The “SIMULATION FREQUENCY OUTPUT” message indicates that simulation is
active.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress, i.e. the
current measuring values are output correctly via the other outputs.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
Endress+Hauser
95
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION (FREQUENCY)
VALUE SIMULATION
FREQUENCY
(4303)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless FREQUENCY was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200) and the SIMULATION FREQUENCY function (4302) is active (=
ON).
Use this function to define a free selectable frequency value (e.g. 500 Hz) which should
be output at the frequency output (with maximum pulse frequency or shortened minimum pulse width). This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring
device itself.
User input:
0...12500 Hz
Factory setting:
0 Hz
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
96
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION (FREQUENCY)
SIMULATION PULSE
(4322)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the PULSE option was selected in the OPERATING
MODE function.
Use this function to activate simulation of the pulse output.
Options:
OFF
COUNTDOWN
The pulses specified in the VALUE SIMULATION PULSE function are output.
CONTINUOUSLY
Pulses are continuously output with the pulse width specified in the PULSE WIDTH
function. Simulation is started once the CONTINUOUSLY option is confirmed with the
F key.
!
Note!
Simulation is started by confirming the CONTINUOUSLY option with the F key.
The simulation can be switched off again via the SIMULATION PULSE function.
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The notice message #631 “SIM. PULSE” indicates that simulation is active.
• The on/off ratio is 1:1 for both types of simulation.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress, i.e. the
current measured values are output correctly via the other outputs.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
VALUE SIMULATION
PULS
(4323)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the COUNTDOWN option was selected in the SIMULATION PULSE function.
Use this function to specify the number of pulses (e.g. 50) which are output during the
simulation. This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring device itself.
The pulses are output with the pulse width specified in the PULSE WIDTH function. The
on/off ratio is 1:1.
Simulation is started once the specified value is confirmed with the F key. The display
remains at 0 if the specified pulses have been output.
User input:
0...10 000
Factory setting:
0
!
Note!
Simulation is started by confirming the simulation value with the F key.
The simulation can be switched off again via the SIMULATION PULSE function.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
Endress+Hauser
97
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION (STATUS)
ACTUAL STATUS
(4341)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the STATUS setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to check the current status of the status output.
User Interface:
NOT CONDUCTIVE
CONDUCTIVE
SIMULATION SWITCH
POINT
(4342)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the STATUS setting was selected in the OPERATION
MODE function (4200).
Use this function to activate simulation of the status output.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The “SIMULATION STATUS OUTPUT” message indicates that simulation is active.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress, i.e. the
current measuring values are output correctly via the other outputs.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
VALUE SIMULATION
SWITCH POINT
(4343)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless STATUS was selected in the OPERATION MODE
function (4200) and the SIMULATION SWITCH POINT function (4342) is active (=
ON).
Use this function to define the switching response of the status output during the simulation. This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring device itself.
Options:
NOT CONDUCTIVE
CONDUCTIVE
Factory setting:
NOT CONDUCTIVE
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
98
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
7.2.3
Function group INFORMATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
420
⇓
OPERATION
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
430
⇓
⇒
INFORMATION
438
CONFIGURATION
420
⇓
OPERATION
430
⇓
INFORMATION
438
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ INFORMATION
TERMINAL NUMBER
(4380)
Endress+Hauser
Use this function to view the numbers of the terminals (in the connection compartment)
and the polarity used by the pulse/frequency output.
99
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.3
Group RELAY OUTPUT (1...2)
7.3.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 1
EGA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
470
EGB
⇒
CONFIGURATION
470
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 2
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN RELAY
(4700)
Use this function to assign a switching function to the relay output.
Options (standard):
OFF
ON (operation)
FAULT MESSAGE
NOTICE MESSAGE
FAULT MESSAGE or NOTICE MESSAGE
EPD (Empty pipe detection, only if active)
FLOW DIRECTION
LIMIT MASS FLOW
LIMIT VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT DENSITY
LIMIT REFERENCE DENSITY
LIMIT TEMPERATURE
LIMIT TOTALIZER 1...3
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
BATCH VALVE 1 (e.g. to control valve 1)
BATCH VALVE 2 (e.g. to control valve 2)
BATCH RUNNING
> BATCH TIME
>< BATCH QUANTITIES (< min. / > max. batching quantity)
PROGRESS NOTE (batching end approaching)
!
Note!
• The batching valves defined in the function BATCH STAGES (7208) are the only available selection (max. 3).
• Only the monitoring functions (7240...7243) which have a value not equal to zero
(max. 3) are available as selection.
(continued on next page)
100
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN RELAY
(continued)
Advanced options with optional software package CONCENTRATION:
LIMIT TARGET MASS FLOW
LIMIT TARGET % MASS PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT TARGET VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT TARGET % VOLUME PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER MASS FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER % MASS PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER % VOLUME PROPORTION FLOW
LIMIT CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
LIMIT % BLACK LIQUOR
LIMIT BAUME > 1
LIMIT BAUME < 1
LIMIT API
LIMIT PLATO
LIMIT BALLING
LIMIT BRIX
LIMIT OTHER (_ _ _ _ flexible concentration)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS:
LIMIT MASS FLOW DEVIATION
LIMIT DENSITY DEVIATION
LIMIT REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION
LIMIT TEMPERATURE DEVIATION
LIMIT TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION
LIMIT ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSOR DEVIATION
Factory setting:
FAULT MESSAGE
!
Note!
• It is very important to read and comply with the information on the switching characteristics of the relay output, (see Page 108).
• It is advisable to configure at least one relay output as a fault output and define the outputs' response to error.
• The relay output is configured as a normally open (NO or make) contact by default. It
can be reconfigured as a normally closed (NC or break) contact by means of a jumper
on the relay module (see Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA
059D/06/en).
• If you select OFF or ON, the only function shown in the CONFIGURATION function
group is this function ASSIGN RELAY (4700).
ON-VALUE
(4701)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless LIMIT VALUE or FLOW DIRECTION was selected in
the ASSIGN RELAY function (4700).
Use this function to assign a value to the switch-on point (relay output pulls up). The
value can be higher or lower than the switch-off point. Positive or negative values are
permissible, depending on the measured variable in question (e.g. mass flow, totalizer
reading).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402) or
UNIT MASS FLOW (0400).
• Only the switch-on point is available for flow direction output (no switch-off point). If
you enter a value not equal to the zero flow (e.g. 5 ), the difference between the zero
flow and the value entered corresponds to half the switching hysteresis.
Endress+Hauser
101
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION
SWITCH-ON DELAY
(4702)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless LIMIT VALUE or FLOW DIRECTION was selected in
the ASSIGN RELAY function (4700).
Use this function to define a delay (0 ... 100 seconds) for pull-up (i.e. signal changes from
0 to 1) of the relay output. The delay starts when the limit value is reached. The relay
output does switch when the delay has timed out and the switch on condition has been
valid over the delay time.
User input:
fixed-point number 0.0...100.0 s
Factory setting:
0.0 s
OFF-VALUE
(4703)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless LIMIT VALUE was selected in the ASSIGN RELAY
function (4700).
Use this function to assign a value to the switch-off point (relay drops out). The value can
be higher or lower than the switch-on point. Positive or negative values are permissible,
depending on the measured variable in question (e.g. mass flow, totalizer reading).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [kg/h] or 2 [kg/l] or 200 [°C]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402) or
UNIT MASS FLOW (0400).
• If SYMMETRY is selected in the function MEASURING MODE (4705) and values with
different signs are entered for the switch-on and switch-off points, the notice message
“INPUT RANGE EXCEEDED” appears.
SWITCH-OFF DELAY
(4704)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless LIMIT VALUE was selected in the ASSIGN RELAY
function (4700).
Use this function to define a delay (0 ... 100 seconds) for drop-out (i.e. signal changes
from 1 to 0) of the relay output. The delay starts when the limit value is reached.
The relay output does switch when the delay has timed out and the switch off condition
has been valid over the delay time.
User input:
fixed-point number 0.0...100.0 s
Factory setting:
0.0 s
102
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ CONFIGURATION
MEASURING MODE
(4705)
!
Note!
This function is not visible unless a limit value was assigned to the relay output.
Use this function to define the measuring mode for the relay output.
Options:
STANDARD
The relay output signal switches at the defined switch points.
SYMMETRY
The relay output signal switches at the defined switch points, irrespective of the sign. If
you define a switch point with a positive sign, the relay output switches as soon as the
value is reached in the negative direction (negative sign), (see illustration).
Factory setting:
STANDARD
Example for the SYMMETRY measuring mode:
Switch-on point Q = 4
Switch-off point Q = 10
➀ = Relay energised
➁ = Relay de-energised
Q
10
4
0
t
-4
- 10
➀
➁
!
➀
➁
➀
A0001247
Note!
• SYMMETRY cannot be selected unless the values in the ON-VALUE (4701) and OFFVALUE (4703) functions have the same sign or one of the values is zero.
• If the values have different signs, SYMMETRY cannot be selected and an “ASSIGNMENT NOT POSSIBLE” message is displayed.
TIME CONSTANT
(4706)
Use this function to enter a time constant defining how the measuring signal reacts to
severely fluctuating measured variables, either very quickly (enter a low time constant) or
with damping (enter a high time constant).
Damping acts on the measuring signal before the switch status changes, and consequently before switch-on or switch-off delay is activated.
The purpose of damping, therefore, is to prevent the relay output changing state continuously in response to fluctuations in flow.
User input:
fixed-point number: 0.00...100.00 s
Factory setting:
0.00 s
Endress+Hauser
103
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.3.2
Function group OPERATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 1
EGA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
470
⇓
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 2
EGB
⇒
OPERATION
474
CONFIGURATION
470
⇓
OPERATION
474
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION
ACTUAL STATUS
RELAY
(4740)
Use this function to check the current status of the relay output.
A jumper on the contact side defines the relay output as a normally open (NO or make) or
normally closed (NC or break) contact (see Operating Instruction Proline Promass 83, BA
059D/06/en).
User interface:
BREAK CONTACT OPEN
BREAK CONTACT CLOSED
MAKE CONTACT OPEN
MAKE CONTACT CLOSED
SIMULATION SWITCH
POINT
(4741)
Use this function to activate simulation of the relay output.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The “SIMULATION RELAY” message indicates that simulation is active.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress,
i.e. the current measured values are output correctly via the other outputs.
• If the "BATCH VALVE 1" option was selected in the ASSIGN RELAY (4700) function,
the functional test takes place by means of the BATCH PROCEDURE (7260) function,
see Page 159.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
104
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ OPERATION
VALUE SIMULATION
SWITCH POINT
(4742)
!
Note!
The function is not visible unless the function SIMULATION SWITCH POINT (4741) is
active (= ON).
Use this function to define the status of the relay output during the simulation. This value
is used to test downstream devices and the measuring device itself Depending on the
relay configuration (as make or break contact) the following selections are available.
Options:
Relay output configured as normally open (make) contact:
MAKE CONTACT OPEN
MAKE CONTACT CLOSED
Relay output configured as normally closed (break) contact:
BREAK CONTACT OPEN
BREAK CONTACT CLOSED
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
Endress+Hauser
105
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.3.3
Function group INFORMATION
OUTPUT
E
⇒
CURRENT OUTPUT 1
EAA
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 2
EAB
⇓
CURRENT OUTPUT 3
EAC
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 1 ECA
⇓
PULSE/FREQ. OUTPUT 2 ECB
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 1
EGA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
470
⇓
OPERATION
⇓
RELAY OUTPUT 2
474
⇓
EGB
⇒
INFORMATION
478
CONFIGURATION
470
⇓
OPERATION
474
⇓
INFORMATION
478
Function description
OUTPUT ➞ RELAY OUTPUT (1...2) ➞ INFORMATION
TERMINAL NUMBER
(4780)
106
Use this function to view the numbers of the terminals (in the connection compartment)
and the polarity used by the relay output.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.3.4
7 Block OUTPUT
Information on the response of the relay output
General
If you have configured the relay output signal for “LIMIT VALUE” or “FLOW DIRECTION”, you can define the requisite
switch points in the ON-VALUE and OFF-VALUE functions. When the measured variable in question reaches one of these
predefined values, the relay output switches as shown in the illustrations below.
Relay output configured for “flow direction”
The value you entered in the function ON-VALUE defines the switch point for the positive and negative directions of flow.
If, for example, the switch point you define is = 1 m3/h, the relay drops out at –1 m3/h and pulls up at
+1 m3/h. Set the switch point to 0 if your process calls for direct switchover (no switching hysteresis). If low flow cut off is
used, it is advisable to set hysteresis to a value higher than or equal to the low flow cut off rate.
-Q
-1
0
+1
Q
a
b
A0001236
a
b
Relay energized
Relay de-energized
Relay output configured for limit value
The relay output signal switches as soon as the measured variable undershoots or overshoots a defined switch point.
Application: Monitoring flow or process-related boundary conditions.
Measured variable
➀
➂
➁
➂
t
➀ = ON > SWITCH-OFF POINT (maximum safety)
➁ = ON > SWITCH-OFF POINT (minimum safety)
➂ = Relay de-energised
Endress+Hauser
A0001235
107
7 Block OUTPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7.3.5
Switching responce of the relay output
Contact*
Function
State
Relay coil
NC
ON (operation)
NO
System in measuring mode
XXX.XXX.XX
energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001052
System not in measuring mode
(power supply failed)
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
XXX.XXX.XX
de-energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001291
Fault message
A0001239
System OK
XXX.XXX.XX
energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001052
(System or process error)
Fault → Response to error, outputs /Inputs and totalizers
XXX.XXX.XX
de-energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001291
Notice message
System OK
XXX.XXX.XX
energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001052
(System or process error)
Fault → Continuation of measuring
XXX.XXX.XX
de-energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001291
Fault message
or
Notice message
System OK
XXX.XXX.XX
energized
Esc
+
-
E
A0001052
(System or process error)
Fault → Response to error
or
Note → Continuation of measuring
XXX.XXX.XX
de-energized
Esc
-
+
E
A0001291
108
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7 Block OUTPUT
Contact*
Function
State
Relay coil
NC
NO
Empty pipe detec- Measuring tube full
tion (EPD)
energized
A0001292
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
A0001239
A0001237
A0001240
A0001238
Measuring tube partially
filled /empty measuring tube
de-energized
A0001293
Flow direction
forward
energized
A0001241
reverse
de-energized
A0001242
Limit value not overshot or
Limit value
undershot
– Mass flow
– Volume flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Density
– Reference density
Limit value overshot or undershot
– Temperature
– Totalizer
energized
A0001243
de-energized
A0001244
* Terminal numbers in accordance with the function TERMINAL NUMBER (4780) on Page 106.
!
Note!
If the measuring device has two relays, the factory setting is:
• Relay 1 → normally open contact (NO)
• Relay 2 → normally closed contact (NC)
"
Caution!
When using the optional software package BATCHING, it is advisable for the contacts (either normally open or normally
closed contacts) to have the same switching responce for all relay outputs used.
Endress+Hauser
109
110
INPUT
(F)
Block
⇒
CONFIGURATION
(500) P. 111
⇒
⇐
(504) P. 112
OPERATION
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
OPERATION
(524) P. 116
INFORMATION
(528) P. 117
⇓⇑
⇓⇑
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
CONFIGURATION
(520) P. 114
(508) P. 113
INFORMATION
⇒
⇐
CURRENT INPUT
⇒
(FCA) P. 114
⇒
Function
groups
⇒
SIM. STATUS IN.
(5041) P. 112
(5001) P. 111
ACTIVE LEVEL
TERMINAL
NUMBER
(5280) P. 117
ACTUAL
CURRENT IN.
(5240) P. 116
⇒
SIM.
CURRENT IN.
(5241) P. 116
ASSIGN CURNT.
CURRENT SPAN
IN.
⇒ (5201) P. 114
(5200) P. 114
TERMINAL
NUMBER
(5080) P. 113
ACTUAL STATUS IN.
(5040) P. 112
ASSIGN STATUS
INPUT
⇒
(5000) P. 111
(5203) P. 115
(5202) P. 114
VAL. SIM. CURR.
IN.
(5242) P. 116
VALUE 20 mA
VALUE 0_4 mA
VALUE SIM. STATUS IN.
(5042) P. 112
MIN. PULSE
WIDTH
(5002) P. 111
FAILSAFE MODE
(5204) P. 115
Functions
8
(FAA) P. 111
STATUS INPUT
Groups
8 Block INPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Block INPUT
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8 Block INPUT
8.1
Group STATUS INPUT
8.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
500
Function description
INPUT ➞ STATUS INPUT ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN STATUS INPUT
(5000)
Use this function to assign a switching function to the status input.
Options:
OFF
RESET TOTALIZER 1
RESET TOTALIZER 2
RESET TOTALIZER 3
RESET ALL TOTALIZERS
POSITIVE ZERO RETURN
RESET FAULT MESSAGE
ZERO POINT ADJUSTMENT
Advanced options with optional software package BATCHING:
RUN BATCHING (start/stop)
HOLD BATCHING (stop/continue)
RESET BATCH SUM (resetting total quantity / total quantity totalizers)
Advanced options with optional software package ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS:
AKQUISITION
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the MANUELL setting is selected in the ACQUISITION MODE function (7410).
Factory setting:
OFF
"
Caution!
POSITIVE ZERO RETURN is active as long as the level is available at the status input
(continuous signal). All other assignments react to a change in level (pulse) at the status
input.
ACTIVE LEVEL
(5001)
Use this function to define whether the assigned function (see function ASSIGN STATUS
INPUT) is released when the signal level is present (HIGH) or not present (LOW).
Options:
HIGH
LOW
Factory setting:
HIGH
MINIMUM
PULSE WIDTH
(5002)
Use this function to define a minimum pulse width which the input pulse must achieve in
order to trigger the selected switching function, (see function ASSIGN STATUS INPUT
(5000)).
User input:
20...100 ms
Factory setting:
50 ms
Endress+Hauser
111
8 Block INPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8.1.2
Function group OPERATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
500
⇓
OPERATION
504
Function description
INPUT ➞ STATUS INPUT ➞ OPERATION
ACTUAL STATUS INPUT
(5040)
Use this function to view the current level of the status input.
User Interface:
HIGH
LOW
SIMULATION
STATUS INPUT
(5041)
Use this function to simulate the status input, in other words to trigger the function
assigned to the status input (see the function ASSIGN STATUS INPUT (5000) on
Page 111).
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The “SIMULATION STATUS INPUT” message indicates that simulation is active.
• The measuring device continues to measure while simulation is in progress, i.e. the
current measuring values are output correctly via the other outputs.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
VALUE SIMULATION
STATUS INPUT
(5042)
!
Note!
The function is not visible unless the function SIMULATION
STATUS INPUT (5041) is active (= ON).
Use this function to define the level to be assumed at the status output during the simulation. This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring device itself.
Options:
HIGH
LOW
Factory setting:
LOW
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
112
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8.1.3
8 Block INPUT
Function group INFORMATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
500
⇓
OPERATION
504
⇓
INFORMATION
508
Function description
INPUT ➞ STATUS INPUT ➞ INFORMATION
TERMINAL NUMBER
(5080)
Endress+Hauser
Use this function to view the numbers of the terminals (in the connection compartment)
and the polarity used by the status input.
113
8 Block INPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8.2
8.2.1
Group CURRENT INPUT
Function group CONFIGURATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇓
CURRENT INPUT
FCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
520
Function description
INPUT ➞ CURRENT INPUT ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN CURRENT
INPUT
(5200)
Use this function to assign a process variable to the current input.
Options:
OFF
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
Factory setting:
OFF
CURRENT SPAN
(5201)
Use this function to select the current range. This selection defines the operational range
and the upper and lower signal on alarm.
Options:
0–20 mA
4–20 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR
4–20 mA US
0–20 mA (25 mA)
4–20 mA (25 mA)
Factory setting:
4–20 mA NAMUR
!
Note!
When switching the hardware from an active (factory setting) to a passive output signal,
select a current range of 4–20 mA (please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en).
Current range / operational range (measuring information):
0–20 mA / 0...20.5 mA
4–20 mA / 4...20.5 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR / 3.8...20.5 mA
4–20 mA US / 3.9...20.8 mA
0–20 mA (25 mA) / 0...24 ma
4–20 mA (25 mA) / 4...24 mA
VALUE 0_4 mA
(5202)
Use this function to assign a value to the 0/4 mA current.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
Dependent on the process variable assigned to the current input (see function ASSIGN
CURRENT INPUT, 5200).
– Pressure: 0 barg
– Temperature: –50 °C
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the functions UNIT DENSITY (0420) or UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422).
114
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8 Block INPUT
Function description
INPUT ➞ CURRENT INPUT ➞ CONFIGURATION
VALUE 20 mA
(5203)
Use this function to assign a value to the 20 mA current.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
Dependent on the process variable assigned to the current input (see function ASSIGN
CURRENT INPUT, 5200).
– Pressure: 100 barg
– Temperature: 200 °C
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the functions UNIT PRESSURE (0426) or UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422).
FAILSAFE MODE
(5204)
Use this function to enter a defined error value for the process variable concerned.
If the current value lies outside of the selected range (see function CURRENT SPAN,
5201), then the process variable is set to the “error value” defined here and a corresponding notice message CURRENT INPUT RANGE (# 363) is generated.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
Dependent on the process variable assigned to the current input (see function ASSIGN
CURNT. IN., 5200).
– Pressure: 50 barg
– Temperature: 75 °C
!
Note!
• Triggered amplifier faults or the error behaviour of the outputs do not have any influence on the current input.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the functions UNIT DENSITY (0420) or UNIT
TEMPERATURE (0422).
Endress+Hauser
115
8 Block INPUT
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8.2.2
Function group OPERATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇓
CURRENT INPUT
FCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
520
⇓
OPERATION
524
Function description
INPUT ➞ CURRENT INPUT ➞ OPERATION
ACTUAL CURRENT
INPUT
(5240)
The actual value of the input current appears on the display.
SIMULATION CURRENT
INPUT
(5241)
Use this function to activate the simulation of the current input.
User interface:
0.0...25 mA
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• An active simulation is displayed by the notice message “SIM. CURR. IN” (# 661).
• The value output for the simulation at the current input is defined in the function
VALUE SIMULATION CURRENT INPUT (5242).
• The measuring device remains fully operational during the simulation and the current
measured values are output correctly via the other outputs and the display.
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved in the event of a power failure.
VALUE SIMULATION
CURRENT INPUT
(5242)
!
Note!
This function is only available if the function SIMULATION CURRENT INPUT (5241) is
switched on.
Use this function to specify a freely selectable value, e.g. 12 mA, which is to be simulated
at the current input. This value is used to test downstream devices and the measuring
device itself.
User input:
0.00...25.00 mA
Factory setting:
0.00 mA or 4 mA (depending on the setting in function 5201).
"
Caution!
The setting is not saved in the event of a power failure.
116
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
8.2.3
8 Block INPUT
Function group INFORMATION
INPUT
F
⇒
STATUS INPUT
FAA
⇓
CURRENT INPUT
FCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
520
⇓
OPERATION
524
⇓
INFORMATION
528
Function description
INPUT ➞ CURRENT INPUT ➞ INFORMATION
TERMINAL NUMBER
(5280)
Endress+Hauser
This function is used to display the polarity and numbers of the terminals (in the terminal
compartment) occupied by the current input.
117
118
BASIC FUNC⇒
TION
(G)
Block
HART
(GAA) P. 119
Groups
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
(604) P. 120
INFORMATION
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(600) P. 119
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇒
⇒
ZEROPOINT
ADJUST
(6480) P. 127
⇒
⇒
⇐
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(680) P. 133
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(660) P. 131
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
FLOW COEFFICIENT
⇒
(684) P. 134
⇒
⇐
⇒
⇐
ADDITIONAL
COEFFICIENT
(686) P. 136
⇒
DENSITY COEFFICIENT
⇒
(685) P. 135
MIN. TEMP.
MEAS.
(6860) P. 136
COEFF.
C0
(6850) P. 135
COEFF.
KM
(6840) P. 134
(6800) P. 133
K-FACTOR
INST. DIR.
SENSOR
(6600) P. 131
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
PRESSURE CORPRESSURE MODE
RECTION
⇒ (6500) P. 130 ⇒
(650) P. 130
⇒
⇐
⇒
(648) P. 127
ADJUSTMENT
⇒
⇐
SENSOR DATA
(GNA) P. 133
⇒
(6420) P. 123
EPD
ASSIGN
LF CUT OFF
(6400) P. 121
MANUFACTURER
ID
⇒
(6040) P. 120
⇒
TAG DESC.
OFF-VALUE
LF CUT OFF
(6403) P. 121
(6002) P. 119
BUS ADDRESS
PRESS. SHOCK
SUPP.
(6404) P. 122
HART PROTOCOL
(6003) P. 119
DENSITY SETPOINT 1
(6483) P. 128
MIN. TEMP.
MEAS.
(6860) P. 136
COEFF.
C1
(6851) P. 135
COEFF.
KM 2
(6841) P. 134
(6803) P. 133
ZERO POINT
MAX. TEMP.
MEAS.
(6861) P. 136
COEFF.
C2
(6852) P. 135
COEFF.
KT
(6842) P. 134
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
(6804) P. 133
DENSITY DAMPFLOW DAMPING
ING
(6603) P. 131
(6602) P. 131
(6501) P. 130
PRESSURE
DENSITY ADJUST
MODE
(6482) P. 128
EXPANSION
COEF. LIN.
(6462) P. 125
COEFF.
C4
(6854) P. 135
COEFF.
KD 2
(6844) P. 134
TEMPERATURE
MEASUREM.
(6606) P. 132
DENSITY SETPOINT 2
(6485) P. 128
REF. TEMPERATURE
(6464) P. 126
EPD
EXC.CURR.MAX
(6426) P. 123
WRITE
PROTECTION
(6004) P. 119
MIN. TEMP. CAR- MAX. TEMP. CARRIER
RIER
(6862) P. 136
(6863) P. 136
COEFF.
C3
(6853) P. 135
COEFF.
KD 1
(6843) P. 134
POS. ZERO
RETURN
(6605) P. 131
MEASURE FLUID
1
(6484) P. 128
EXPANSION
COEF. SQR.
(6463) P. 125
EPD VALUE LOW EPD VALUE HIGH EPD RESP. TIME
(6425) P. 123
(6423) P. 123
(6424) P. 123
ON-VALUE
LF CUT OFF
(6402) P. 121
(6041) P. 120
DEVICE ID
(6001) P. 119
REF. PARAMETER
COR. VOL. CALC.
FIX. REF. DENSITY
⇒ (6460) P. 125 ⇒ (6461) P. 125
(646) P. 125
⇒
⇐
SYSTEM
PARAMETER
(GLA) P. 131
⇒
⇐
EPD PARAMETER
⇒
(642) P. 123
TAG NAME
(6000) P. 119
COEFF.
C5
(6855) P. 135
MEASURED
FLUID 2
(6486) P. 128
Functions
DENSITY ADJUST
(6487) P. 129
RESTORE
ORIGINAL
(6488) P. 129
9
PROCESS PARAMCONFIGURATION
ETER
⇒
⇒
(640) P. 121
(GIA) P. 121
⇒
Function
groups
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Block BASIC FUNCTION
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
9.1
Group HART
9.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
600
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ HART ➞ CONFIGURATION
TAG NAME
(6000)
Use this function to enter a tag name for the measuring device. You can edit and read this
tag name via the local display or the HART protocol.
User input:
max. 8-character text, permissible: A-Z, 0-9, +, –, punctuation marks
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” (no text)
TAG DESCRIPTION
(6001)
Use this function to enter a tag description for the measuring device. You can edit and
read this tag description via the local display or the HART protocol.
User input:
max. 16-character text, permissible: A-Z, 0-9, +, –, punctuation marks
Factory setting:
“_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” (No text)
BUS ADDRESS
(6002)
Use this function to define the address for the exchange of data with the HART protocol.
User input:
0...15
Factory setting:
0
!
Note!
Addresses 1...15: a constant 4 mA current is applied.
HART PROTOCOL
(6003)
Use this function to display if the HART protocol is active.
User Interface:
OFF = HART protocol not active
ON = HART protocol active
!
Note!
The HART protocol can be activated with the selection 4-20 mA HART resp.
4-20 mA (25 mA) HART in the function CURRENT SPAN, (see Page 63).
WRITE PROTECTION
(6004)
Use this function to check whether the measuring device can be write-accessed.
User Interface:
OFF = Data exchange is possible
ON = Data exchange disabled
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
Write protection is activated and deactivated by means of a jumper on the I/O module
(see Operating Instruction Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en).
Endress+Hauser
119
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.1.2
Function group INFORMATION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
600
⇓
INFORMATION
604
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ HART ➞ OPERATION
MANUFACTURER ID
(6040)
Use this function to view the manufacturer ID in decimal numerical format.
User Interface:
– Endress+Hauser
– 17 (≅ 11 hex) for Endress+Hauser
DEVICE ID
(6041)
Use this function to view the device ID in hexadecimal numerical format.
User Interface:
51 (≅ 81 dez) for Promass 83
120
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
9.2
Group PROCESS PARAMETER
9.2.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
640
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN LOW FLOW
CUT OFF
(6400)
Use this function to assign the switch point for low flow cut off rate suppression.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Factory setting:
MASS FLOW
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW
CUT OFF
(6402)
Use this function to assign a value to the switch-on point for low flow cut off.
Low flow cut off is active if the value entered is not equal to 0. The sign of the flow value
is highlighted on the display to indicate that low flow cut off is active.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, [unit]
Factory setting:
Depends on nominal diameter
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (see Page 17).
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW
CUT OFF
(6403)
Use this function to enter the switch-off (b) point for low flow cut off.
Enter the switch-off point as a positive hysteresis (H) from the switch-on point (a).
User input:
0...100%
Factory setting:
50%
Example:
Q
2
b
a
2
H
1
1
c
c
t
A0001245
Q = Flow [volume/time]
t = Time
H = Hysteresis
a = ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF (6402) = 200 kg/h
b = OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF (6403) = 10%
c = Low flow cut off active
1 = Low flow cut off is switched on at 200 kg/h
2 = Low flow cut off is switched off at 220 kg/h
Endress+Hauser
121
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ CONFIGURATION
PRESSURE SHOCK
SUPPRESSION
(6404)
The closure of a valve can cause brief but severe movements of the fluid in the piping system, movements which the measuring system registers. The pulses totalled in this way
result in a totalizer reading error, particularly in the case of batching processes. For this
reason, the measuring device is equipped with pressure shock suppression (= short-term
signal suppression) which can eliminate system-related “disruptions”.
!
Note!
Note that pressure shock suppression cannot be used unless the low flow cut off is active,
(see function ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF on Page 121).
Use this function to define the time span for active pressure shock suppression.
Activation of the pressure shock suppression
Pressure shock suppression is activated after the flow falls below the switch-on point of
the low flow cut off (see point 1 in graphic).
While pressure shock suppression is active, the following conditions apply:
• Current outputs → outputs the current corresponding to zero flow.
• Pulse-/Freq.-output → outputs the frequency corresponding to zero flow.
• Flow reading on display → 0
• Totalizer reading → the totalizers are pegged at the last correct value.
Deactivation of the pressure shock suppression
The pressure shock suppression is deactivated after the time interval, set in this function,
has passed (see point 2 in graphic).
!
Note!
The actual flow value is displayed and output, when the time interval for the pressure
shock suppression has passed and the flow exceeds the switch-off point of the low flow
cut off (see point 3 in graphic).
Flowrate
Valve closes
Low flow cutoff
OFF-Value
ON-Value
Pressure shock suppression ➝
inactive
➝ inactive
3
2
1
➝ active
time
➝ inactive
Given time
A0001285-EN
User input:
max. 4-digit number, incl. unit: 0.00...100.0 s
Factory setting:
0.00 s
122
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.2.2
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Function group EPD PARAMETER
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
640
⇓
EPD PARAMETER
642
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ EPD PARAMETER
EMPTY PIPE DETECTION
(6420)
Use this function to activate the empty pipe detection (EPD). With empty measuring
tubes the density of the fluid falls below the value specified in the function EPD VALUE
LOW.
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
ON
"
Caution!
• Select a correspondingly low EPD response value in the function EPD VALUE LOW, so
that the difference to the effective density of the fluid is sufficiently large enough. This
ensures that totally empty measuring tubes and not partially filled ones are detected.
• For gas measurement we strongly recommend to switch off empty pipe detection.
EPD VALUE LOW
(6423)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the ON selection was selected in the EMPTY PIPE
DETECTION function.
Use this function to set an lower threshold for the measured density value, in order to
detect possible problems in the process indicated by too low density.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0.2000 kg/l
EPD VALUE HIGH
(6424)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the ON selection was selected in the EMPTY PIPE
DETECTION function.
Use this function to set an upper threshold for the measured density value.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
6.0000 kg/l
EPD RESPONSE TIME
(6425)
Use this function to enter the time span for which the criteria for an empty pipe have to
be satisfied without interruption before a notice message or fault message is generated.
User input:
fixed-point number: 1.0...100 s
Factory setting:
1.0 s
Endress+Hauser
123
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ EPD PARAMETER
EPD EXC.CURR.MAX
(6426)
Empty pipe detection (EPD) can be switched on in this function.
In the event of inhomogeneous fluids or air bubbles, the exciting current of the measuring pipes increases. If the exciting current specified in this function is overshot, error
message #700 “EPD ACTIVE” is output similar to the EPD VALUE LOW (xxxx) function.
User input: 5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting: 100 mA (deactivated)
!
Note!
The function is not activated until a value under 100 mA is input.
Entering the value 100 mA deactivates the function.
124
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.2.3
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Function group REFERENCE PARAMETER
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
640
⇓
EPD PARAMETER
642
⇓
REF. PARAMETER
646
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ REFERENCE PARAMETER
CORRECTED VOLUME
CALCULATION
(6460)
This function is used to set the reference density for calculating the corrected volume
flow.
Options:
FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY
CALCULATED REFERENCE DENSITY
EXTERN (with this option, the reference density can be read in via the current input)
Factory setting:
CALCULATED REFERENCE DENSITY
FIXED REFERENCE
DENSITY
(6461)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY setting was
selected in the CORRECTED VOLUME CALCULATION function (6460).
In this function, a fixed value for the reference density can be entered, with which the
corrected volume flow or corrected volume is calculated.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
1 kg/Nl
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT LINEAR
(6462)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the CALCULATED REFERENCE DENSITY setting
was selected in the CORRECTED VOLUME CALCULATION function (6460).
For temperature-compensated calculations of the reference density an expansion
coefficient specific to the fluid is required and can be entered in this function. (see REFERENCE TEMPERATURE (6464) function on Page 126).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0.5000 e–3 [1/K]
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT SQUARE
(6463)
Use this function to enter a square expansion coefficient, if the temperature
compensation follows a non-linear behaviour. (see REFERENCE TEMPERATURE (6464)
function on Page 126).
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0 e–6 [1/K2]
Endress+Hauser
125
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ REFERENCE PARAMETER
REFERENCE
TEMPERATURE
(6464)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the CALCULATED REFERENCE DENSITY setting
was selected in the CORRECTED VOLUME CALCULATION function (6460).
Entering the reference temperature for calculating the corrected volume flow, the corrected volume and the reference density.
Options:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
20.000 °C
The reference density is calculated as follows:
ρN = ρ · (1 + α ∆ t + β ∆ t2) ; ∆ where t = t − tN
ρN = Reference density
ρ = currently measured fluid density (measuring value Promass)
t = Actual measured temperature of fluid (measuring value Promass)
tN = Reference temperature for calculating the reference
density (e.g. 20 °C)
α = Volumetric expansion coefficient of the fluid,
Unit = [1/K]; K = Kelvin
β = Square volumetric expansion coefficient of the fluid, unit = [1/K2]
126
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.2.4
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Function group ADJUSTMENT
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
640
⇓
EPD PARAMETER
642
⇓
REF. PARAMETER
646
⇓
ADJUSTMENT
648
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ ADJUSTMENT
ZEROPOINT ADJUST
(6480)
This function enables a zero point adjustment to be automatically carried out. The new
zero point determined by the measuring system is adopted by the function ZERO POINT
(see Page 133).
User input:
CANCEL
START
Factory setting:
CANCEL
"
Caution!
Before carrying this out, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83,
BA 059D/06/en for a detailed description of the procedure for zero point adjustment.
!
Note!
• Programming is locked during zero point adjustment.
The message“ZERO ADJUST RUNNING” appears on the display.
• If the zero point adjustment is not possible (e.g. if v > 0.1 m/s) or has been cancelled,
the alarm message “ZERO ADJUST NOT POSSIBLE” appears on the display.
• If the Promass 83 measuring electronics are fitted with a status input, then the zero
point can also be activated by using this input.
Endress+Hauser
127
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ ADJUSTMENT
DENSITY ADJUST
MODE
(6482)
Use this function to select whether a 1-point or a 2-point density adjustment should be
carried out.
Options:
CANCEL
1-POINT
2-POINT
DENSITY SETPOINT 1
(6483)
Use this function to enter the density setpoint value for the first fluid for which you want
to carry out field density adjustment.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
!
Note!
• The preset density entered here should not vary from the actual fluid density by a more
than ±10%.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (see Page 17).
MEASURE FLUID 1
(6484)
In this function the actual density of the first fluid is measured for density adjustment.
Options:
CANCEL
START
DENSITY SETPOINT 2
(6485)
Use this function to enter the density setpoint value for the second fluid for which you
want to carry out field density adjustment.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
!
Note!
• The preset density entered here should not vary from the actual fluid density by a more
than ±10%.
• The difference between the density setpoint values must be at least 0.2 kg/l.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (see Page 17).
MEASURE FLUID 2
(6486)
In this function the current density of the second fluid is measured for density adjustment.
Options:
CANCEL
START
128
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ ADJUSTMENT
DENSITY ADJUST
(6487)
With this function a density adjustment can be carried out on site.
The density adjustment values will thus be recalculated and stored. This ensures that the
values dependent on density calculations (e.g. volume flow) are as accurate as possible.
!
Note!
Before carrying this out, please refer to the Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83,
BA 059D/06/en for a detailed description of the procedure for density adjustment.
Two types of adjustment are possible:
1-point density adjustment (with one fluid)
This type of density adjustment is necessary under the following conditions:
• The sensor does not accurately measure the density which the operator expects based
on laboratory trials.
• The characteristics of the fluid are outside the measuring points set at the factory or
reference conditions under which the flowmeter has been calibrated.
• The plant is used solely for measuring a fluid whose density is to be determined very
accurately under constant conditions.
2-point density adjustment (with two fluids)
This type of adjustment must always be carried out when the measuring tubes are
changed mechanically, e.g. due to:
• Deposits
• Abrasion
• Corrosion
In such instances, the measuring tube resonance frequency is influenced in such a way
that it is no longer compatible with the calibration data determined at the factory.
The 2-point density adjustment takes these mechanically-based changes into account and
calculates new, adjusted calibration data.
Options:
CANCEL
MEASURE FLUID 1
MEASURE FLUID 2
DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
Factory setting:
CANCEL
RESTORE ORIGINAL
(6488)
With this function the original density coefficient determined at the factory are restored.
Options:
NO
YES
Factory setting:
NO
Endress+Hauser
129
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.2.5
Function group PRESSURE CORRECTION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
640
⇓
EPD PARAMETER
642
⇓
REF. PARAMETER
646
⇓
ADJUSTMENT
648
⇓
PRESSURE CORRECT.
650
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ PROCESS PARAMETER ➞ PRESSURE CORRECTION
PRESSURE MODE
(6500)
Use this function to configure an automatic pressure correction. In this way, the effect of
a pressure deviation between the calibration and process pressures on the measured error
for mass flow is compensated for, (see also Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83,
BA 059D/06/en, Accuracy Chapter).
Options:
OFF
MEASURED
This selection is only available if a current input has been selected in the function
ASSIGN CURNT. IN. (5200) PRESSURE.
The actual measured process pressure is read in for pressure correction via the current
input.
FIX
A fixed process pressure for pressure correction is specified (see function PRESSURE
(6501)).
Factory setting:
OFF
PRESSURE
(6501)
!
Note!
This function is only available if FIX was selected in the PRESSURE MODE function
(6500).
Use this function to enter the value for the process pressure which should be used during
pressure correction.
User input:
7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0 bar g
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (see Page 17).
130
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
9.3
Group SYSTEM PARAMETER
9.3.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇓
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
660
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SYSTEM PARAMETER ➞ CONFIGURATION
INSTALLATION DIRECTION SENSOR
(6600)
Use this function to reverse the sign of the flow direction, if necessary.
Options:
NORMAL (flow as indicated by the arrow)
INVERSE (flow opposite to direction indicated by the arrow)
Factory setting:
NORMAL
!
Note!
Ascertain the actual direction of fluid flow with reference to the direction indicated by
the arrow on the sensor (nameplate).
DENSITY DAMPING
(6602)
The density filter allows the sensitivity of the density measuring signal to be lowered with
respect to variations in the density of the fluid, e.g. with inhomogeneous liquids. The
damping acts on all functions and outputs of the measuring device.
User input:
max. 5-digit number, including unit: 0.00...100.00 s
Factory setting:
0.00 s
FLOW DAMPING
(6603)
Setting the filter depth of the digital filter. The sensitivity of the flow measurement signal
can be reduced with respect to interference peaks (e.g. in the event of a high solid content, gas bubbles in the fluid etc.). The reaction time of the measuring device increases
with every increase in the filter setting. The damping acts on all functions and outputs of
the measuring device.
User input:
0...100 s
Factory setting:
0s
POSITIVE ZERO
RETURN
(6605)
Use this function to interrupt evaluation of measured variables.
This is necessary when a piping system is being cleaned, for example.
This setting acts on all function and outputs of the measuring device.
Options:
OFF
ON (signal output is set to the “ZERO FLOW” value, temperature and density are still
output)
Factory setting:
OFF
Endress+Hauser
131
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SYSTEM PARAMETER ➞ CONFIGURATION
TEMPERATURE
MEASUREMENT
(6606)
Use this function to switch between internal and external (via the current input) temperature measurement.
!
Note!
This cell is only available if a current input is present.
Options:
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
This option is only available if TEMPERATUR was selected in the function ASSIGN
CURNT. IN. (5200).
Factory setting:
INTERNAL
132
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
9.4
Group SENSOR DATA
9.4.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇓
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
⇓
SENSOR DATA
GNA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
680
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SENSOR DATA ➞ CONFIGURATION
All sensor data (calibration factor, zero point and nominal diameter) are set at the factory and saved on the S-DAT sensor
memory chip.
"
Caution!
Under normal circumstances you should not change the following parameter settings, because changes affect numerous
functions of the entire measuring facility in general and the accuracy of the measuring system in particular. For this reason, the functions described below cannot be changed even when you enter your personal code.
Contact the E+H service organization if you have any questions about these functions.
!
Note!
The individual values of the functions are also provided on the sensor nameplate.
K-FACTOR
(6800)
This function shows the current calibration factor for the sensor. The calibration factor is
determined and set at the factory.
Factory setting:
Depends on nominal diameter and calibration
ZERO POINT
(6803)
This function shows the current zero point correction value for the sensor.
Zero-point correction is determined and set at the factory.
User Interface:
max. 5-digit number: −99999...+99999
Factory setting:
Depends on calibration
NOMINAL DIAMETER
(6804)
This function shows the nominal diameter for the sensor. The nominal diameter depends
on the size of the sensor and is set at the factory.
Factory setting:
Depends on the size of the sensor
Endress+Hauser
133
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.4.2
Function group FLOW COEFFICIENT
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇓
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
⇓
SENSOR DATA
GNA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
680
⇓
FLOW COEFFICIENT
684
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SENSOR DATA ➞ FLOW COEFFICIENT
All flow coefficients are set at the factory. All the sensor's parameter settings are saved on the S-DAT memory chip.
Contact the E+H service organization if you have any questions about these functions.
134
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KM
(6840)
This function shows the temperature coefficient KM.
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KM 2
(6841)
This function shows the temperature coefficient KM 2.
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KT
(6842)
This function shows the temperature coefficient KT.
CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT KD 1
(6843)
This function shows the calibration coefficient KD 1.
CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT KD 2
(6844)
This function shows the calibration coefficient KD 2.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.4.3
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Function group DENSITY COEFFICIENT
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇓
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
⇓
SENSOR DATA
GNA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
680
⇓
FLOW COEFFICIENT
684
⇓
DENSITY COEFFICIENT
685
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SENSOR DATA ➞ DENSITY COEFFICIENT
All density coefficients are set at the factory. All the sensor's parameter settings are saved on the S-DAT memory chip.
Contact the E+H service organization if you have any questions about these functions.
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 0
(6850)
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 1
(6851)
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 2
(6852)
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 3
(6853)
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 4
(6854)
DENSITY
COEFFICIENT C 5
(6855)
Endress+Hauser
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 0.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 1.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 2.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 3.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 4.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
This function shows the actual density coefficient C 5.
"
Caution!
A density adjustment can alter the calibration value of this coefficient.
135
9 Block BASIC FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
9.4.4
Function group ADDITIONAL COEFFICIENT
BASIC FUNCTION
G
⇒
HART
GAA
⇓
PROCESS PARAMETER
GIA
⇓
SYSTEM PARAMETER
GLA
⇓
SENSOR DATA
GNA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
680
⇓
FLOW COEFFICIENT
684
⇓
DENSITY COEFFICIENT
685
⇓
ADDITIONAL COEFF.
686
Function description
BASIC FUNCTION ➞ SENSOR DATA ➞ ADDITIONAL COEFFICIENT
All sensor data are set at the factory. All the sensor's parameter settings are saved on the S-DAT memory chip.
"
Caution!
These functions are used for displaying device parameters only and consequently cannot be accessed.
Contact the E+H service organization if you have any questions about these functions.
MINIMAL
TEMPERATURE
MEASURED
(6860)
The lowest fluid temperature measured appears on the display.
MAXIMAL
TEMPERATURE
MEASURED
(6861)
The highest fluid temperature measured appears on the display.
MINIMAL TEMPERATURE CARRIER TUBE
(6862)
!
Note!
This function is not available for the Promass 83 E measuring device.
The lowest carrier tube temperature measured appears on the display.
MAXIMAL TEMPERATURE CARRIER TUBE
(6863)
!
Note!
This function is not available for the Promass 83 E measuring device.
The highest carrier tube temperature measured appears on the display.
136
Endress+Hauser
SPECIAL
FUNCTION
(H)
Block
⇒
Function
groups
Endress+Hauser
ADVANCED
DIAGNOSTICS
(HEA) P. 163
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇓⇑
VALVE 1 INT.
SETPOINT
(7280) P. 161
⇒
⇓⇑
EL.-DYN. SENSORS
(747) P. 170
⇓⇑
(746) P. 169
TUBE DAMPING
⇒
⇒
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7470) P. 170
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7460) P. 169
⇒
⇒
⇒
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7450) P. 168
(745) P. 168
TEMPERATURE
⇓⇑
⇒
⇒
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7440) P. 167
⇒
⇒
⇒
REFERENCE DENSITY
⇒
(744) P. 167
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7420) P. 165
ACQUISITION
MODE
(7410) P. 164
REFERENCE
VALUE
(7430) P. 166
⇒
⇒
⇒
(743) P. 166
DENSITY
⇓⇑
(742) P. 165
MASS FLOW
⇓⇑
(741) P. 164
ACQUISITION
(7222) P. 151
OPEN VALVE 2
ASSIGN BATCH
VAR.
(7202) P. 145
(7471) P. 170
ACTUAL VALUE
(7461) P. 169
ACTUAL VALUE
(7451) P. 168
ACTUAL VALUE
(7441) P. 167
ACTUAL VALUE
(7431) P. 166
ACTUAL VALUE
(7421) P. 165
ACTUAL VALUE
ACQUISITION
PERIODE
(7411) P. 164
SELECT REF.
COND.
(7402) P. 163
(7281) P. 161
DRIP QUANTITY
(7223) P. 151
CLOSE VALVE 2
BATCH QUANTITY
(7203) P. 145
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7472) P. 170
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7462) P. 169
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7452) P. 168
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7442) P. 167
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7432) P. 166
MINIMUM
VALUE
(7422) P. 165
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7473) P. 170
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7463) P. 169
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7453) P. 168
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7443) P. 167
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7433) P. 166
MAXIMUM
VALUE
(7423) P. 165
ACQUISITION DO RESET HISTORY
(7412) P. 164
(7413) P. 164
WARNING MODE
(7403) P. 163
VALVE 1 CLOSING TIME
(7282) P. 161
REF. DENSITY
TARGET FL.
(7004) P. 139
EXP. COEF. LIN.
TARGET FL.
(7005) P. 139
EXP. COEF. SQR.
TARG. FL.
(7006) P. 140
LINEAR EXP.
COEF.
(7007) P. 140
SQUARE EXP.
COEF.
(7008) P. 140
REF. TEMPERATURE
(7009) P. 141
(7474) P. 170
HISTORY 1
(7464) P. 169
HISTORY 1
(7454) P. 168
HISTORY 1
(7444) P. 167
HISTORY 1
(7434) P. 166
HISTORY 1
(7424) P. 165
HISTORY 1
(7264) P. 160
BATCH SUM
MAX. FLOW
VALUE
(7244) P. 158
FIX COMP.
QUANTITY
(7204) P. 146
CALCULATION
MODE
(7206) P. 148
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7476) P. 171
(7475) P. 171
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7466) P. 169
(7465) P. 169
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7456) P. 168
(7455) P. 168
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7446) P. 167
(7445) P. 167
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7436) P. 166
(7435) P. 166
ACTUAL DEVIAWARNING LEVEL
TION
(7426) P. 165
(7425) P. 165
RESET
SUM/COUNTER
(7265) P. 160
COMPENSAT.
MODE
(7205) P. 146
AVERAGING DRIP
(7207) P. 148
(7208) P. 149
BATCH STAGES
(7209) P. 149
INPUT FORMAT
COEFFICIENT A0 COEFFICIENT A1 COEFFICIENT A2 COEFFICIENT A3 COEFFICIENT A4 COEFFICIENT B1 COEFFICIENT B2
(7032) P. 142
(7033) P. 142
(7034) P. 142
(7035) P. 143
(7036) P. 143
(7037) P. 143
(7038) P. 143
EXP. COEF. SQR.
CARR. FL.
(7003) P. 139
MIN. BATCHING MAX. BATCHING
PROGRESS NOTE
QUANTITY
QUANTITY
(7243) P. 157
(7241) P. 156
(7242) P. 157
(7221) P. 150
CLOSE VALVE 1
(7201) P. 144
BATCH NAME
CONCENTRATION NAME
(7031) P. 142
EXP. COEF. LIN.
CARR. FL.
(7002) P. 138
BATCH PROCEBATCH DOWNBATCH UPWARDS
BATCH COUNTER
DURE
WARDS
⇒ (7261) P. 159
(7263) P. 160
(7260) P. 159
(7262) P. 160
MAX. BATCH
TIME
(7240) P. 155
(7220) P. 150
OPEN VALVE 1
BATCH SELECTOR
(7200) P. 144
⇒
(7022) P. 142
COEFFICIENT B3
(7039) P. 143
CONCENTRA-
⇒ TION SELECTOR
MODE
(7021) P. 141
REF. COND. USER
CONFIGURATION
⇒ (7401) P. 163 ⇒
(740) P. 163
(728) P. 161
INFORMATION
⇓⇑
(726) P. 159
OPERATION
⇓⇑
(724) P. 155
SUPERVISION
⇓⇑
VALVE PARAMETER
⇒
(722) P. 150
⇓⇑
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(720) P. 144
⇓⇑
REF. DENSITY
CARRIER FL.
(7001) P. 138
Functions
10
⇓⇑
⇓⇑
BATCHING
FUNCTION
(HCA) P. 144
⇓⇑
⇓⇑
DENSITY FUNCDENSITY FUNCCONFIGURATION
TIONS
TION
⇒
⇒
⇒
(700) P. 138
(HAA) P. 138
(7000) P. 138
Groups
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
137
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.1
Group DENSITY FUNCTIONS
10.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
DENSITY FUNCTIONS
HAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
700
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
DENSITY FUNCTION
(7000)
Use this function to select the desired density function which is used to calculate special
density values or the percentage proportion of components in two-phase fluids.
User input:
OFF
% MASS / % VOLUME
%-BLACK LIQUOR
°BAUME > 1 SG
°BAUME < 1 SG
° API
° PLATO
° BALLING
° BRIX
FLEXIBLE
Factory setting:
OFF
REFERENCE DENSITY
CARRIER FLUID
(7001)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the reference density (density at reference temp.) of the carrier
fluid. This value is required for temperature-compensated calculation of the target fluid
content in a two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
Factory setting:
1.0000 kg/l
!
Note!
• Carrier fluid = transporting liquid, (e.g. water)
Target fluid = material transported (e.g. lime powder)
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421),
see Page 20.
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT LINEAR CARRIER FLUID
(7002)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific expansion coefficient for the carrier fluid for
linear temperature curves. This value is required for temperature-compensated calculation of the target fluid content in a
two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.5000 e–3 [1/K]
138
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT SQUARE CARRIER FLUID
(7003)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific square expansion coefficient for the carrier
fluid for non-linear temperature curves. This value is required for temperature-compensated calculation of the target fluid content in a
two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.0000 e–6 [1/K2]
REFERENCE DENSITY
TARGET FLUID
(7004)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the reference density (density at reference temperature) of the
carrier fluid. This value is required for temperature-compensated calculation of the target
fluid content in a two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
Factory setting:
1.0000 kg/l
!
Note!
• Carrier fluid = transporting liquid, (e.g. water)
Target fluid = material transported (e.g. lime powder)
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421),
(see Page 20).
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT LINEAR TARGET
FLUID
(7005)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific linear expansion coefficient for the carrier
fluid for linear temperature curves. This value is required for temperature-compensated
calculation of the target fluid content in a
two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.5000 e–3 [1/K]
Endress+Hauser
139
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
EXPANSION COEFFICIENT SQUARE TARGET FLUID
(7006)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• % MASS / % VOLUME
• %-BLACK LIQUOR
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific square expansion coefficient for the carrier
fluid for non-linear temperature curves. This value is required for temperature-compensated calculation of the target fluid content in a
two-phase fluid.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.0000 e–6 [1/K2]
LINEAR EXPANSION
COEFFICIENT
(7007)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• °BAUME < 1 SG
• °BAUME > 1 SG
• ° API
• ° PLATO
• ° BALLING
• ° BRIX
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific linear expansion coefficient (for linear temperature curves), to calculate the temperature-compensated density functions.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.5000 e–3 [1/K]
SQUARE EXPANSION
COEFFICIENT
(7008)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless one of the following was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000):
• °BAUME < 1 SG
• °BAUME > 1 SG
• ° API
• ° PLATO
• ° BALLING
• ° BRIX
Use this function to enter the fluid-specific square expansion coefficient (for non-linear
temperature curves), to calculate the temperature-compensated density functions.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
0.0000 e–6 [1/K2]
140
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
REFERENCE TEMPERATURE
(7009)
!
Note!
This function is only available if OFF, °BRIX or FLEXIBEL was not selected in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000).
Use this function to enter the reference temperature for the density functions and for calculating the corrected volume flow and the corrected volume.
User input:
4-digit fixed-point number, including unit and sign
Factory setting:
20 °C
MODE
(7021)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the FLEXIBLE setting was selected in the DENSITY
FUNCTION function (7000).
Use this function to select a user-specific method of calculating the concentration of the
density and temperature measured.
In order to use this function, the following values are required:
• Concentration (see formula)
• Currently measured density
• Currently measured temperature
The concentration is calculated from the density and temperature as follows:
K = A0 + A1 · ρ + A2 · ρ2 + A3 · ρ3 + A4 · ρ4 + B1 · T + B2 · T2 + B3 · T3
K = Concentration
ρ = currently measured density
A0 = Value from function COEFFICIENT A0 (7032)
A1 = Value from function COEFFICIENT A1 (7033)
A2 = Value from function COEFFICIENT A2 (7034)
A3 = Value from function COEFFICIENT A3 (7035)
A4 = Value from function COEFFICIENT A4 (7036)
B1 = Value from function COEFFICIENT B1 (7037)
B2 = Value from function COEFFICIENT B2 (7038)
B3 = Value from function COEFFICIENT B3 (7039)
T = currently measured temperature in °C
Options:
% MASS 3D
% VOLUME 3D
% MASS 2D
% VOLUME 2D
OTHER 3D
OTHER 2D
Factory setting:
% MASS 3D
!
Note!
If the relation between concentration density and temperature is given as table, the equation coefficients can be determined e.g. via the ToF Tool-Fieldtool Package operation program and transmitted to the measuring device.
Endress+Hauser
141
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
CONCENTRATION
SELECTOR
(7022)
Use this function to select a concentration specification. There are four different concentration specifications available, via which various concentrations can be defined.
Options:
CONC. # 1 (or the name that has been defined in the function CONCENTRATION
NAME (7031) for concentration specification 1)
CONC. # 2 (or the name that has been defined in the function CONCENTRATION
NAME (7031) for concentration specification 2)
CONC. # 3 (or the name that has been defined in the function CONCENTRATION
NAME (7031) for concentration specification 3)
CONC. # 4 (or the name that has been defined in the function CONCENTRATION
NAME (7031) for concentration specification 4)
Factory setting:
CONC. # 1
!
Note!
• By selecting a concentration specification and the (subsequent) relevant settings, up to
4 different concentrations can be preconfigured and selected when needed.
• All settings in the subsequent functions of this function group are each only valid for
the concentration specification selected in the function CONCENTRATION SELECTOR (7022). This means that the input or selection is assigned to the currently
selected concentration specification (e.g. in factory setting CONC. # 1).
CONCENTRATION
NAME
(7031)
Use this function to assign a specific name to the concentration specification.
User input:
max. 8-character text, permissible: A-Z, 0-9
Factory setting:
Name of the concentration specification (dependent on the selection in the function
CONCENTRATION NAME (7031), e.g. “CONC. # 1”).
COEFFICIENT A0
(7032)
Coefficient A0 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT A1
(7033)
Coefficient A1 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
142
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ DENSITY FUNCTIONS ➞ CONFIGURATION
COEFFICIENT A2
(7034)
Coefficient A2 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT A3
(7035)
Coefficient A3 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT A4
(7036)
Coefficient A4 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT B1
(7037)
!
Note!
This function does only appear if the option% MASS 3D, % VOLUME 3D or OTHER 3D
was selected in the function MODE (7021).
Coefficient B1 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT B2
(7038)
!
Note!
This function does only appear if the option% MASS 3D, % VOLUME 3D or OTHER 3D
was selected in the function MODE (7021).
Coefficient B2 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
COEFFICIENT B3
(7039)
!
Note!
This function does only appear if the option% MASS 3D, % VOLUME 3D or OTHER 3D
was selected in the function MODE (7021).
Coefficient B3 entry.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
Endress+Hauser
143
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2
Group BATCHING FUNCTION
10.2.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
720
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
BATCH SELECTOR
(7200)
Use this function to select a batching specification. There are six different batching specifications available by means of which different batchings can be defined.
Options:
BATCH # 1 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 1 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
BATCH # 2 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 2 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
BATCH # 3 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 3 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
BATCH # 4 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 4 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
BATCH # 5 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 5 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
BATCH # 6 (or the name which was defined for batching specification 6 in the function
BATCH NAME (7201) )
Factory setting:
BATCH #1
!
Note!
• By selecting a batching specification and its related settings (explained below), up to 6
different batchings can be preconfigured and selected as necessary.
• All the following functions in this function group, as well as the functions in the function groups VALVE PARAMETER (722) and SUPERVISION (724) are assigned to the
batching specification selected here.
• All the settings in the following functions of this function group are valid only for the
batching specification selected in the function BATCH SELECTOR (7200). In other
words, the entry or option is assigned to the batching specification currently selected
(e.g. in the factory setting BATCH # 1).
BATCH NAME
(7201)
Use this function to assign a specific name to the batching specification.
User input:
max. 8-character text, permissible: A-Z, 0-9
Factory setting:
Name of batching specification (depends on selection in the function BATCH SELECTOR
(7200), e.g. “BATCH # 1“).
!
Note!
Once an entry has been made (e.g. “BEER 33“), the batch name (BEER 33) appears in the
home position when selecting the quantity and the name of the batching specification
(e.g. “BATCH # 1“) no longer appears.
144
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE
(7202)
Use this function to assign a batching variable to the batching specification.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Advanced options with the optional software package CONCENTRATION:
TARGET MASS FLOW
TARGET VOLUME FLOW
TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER MASS FLOW
CARRIER VOLUME FLOW
CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
• The possible assignments of the display functions are automatically extended. Once a
batching variable has been selected (MASS or VOLUME), you can locally define the
application-specific function of the minus key (start-stop-continue) and the plus key
(stop-batching name/quantity) in the information line by means of the “batching
menu” assignment. In this way, a direct batching control station is made available
locally at the measuring device by means of the user interface and the controls.
• Select OFF if the BATCHING functionality is no longer to be used. All settings related
to the function (e.g. switching contact assigned to the relay output) must be assigned
to another functionality.
BATCH QUANTITY
(7203)
Use this function to define the quantity to be batched.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0 [unit]
!
Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (ACA), (see
Page 17).
• When the batching quantity entered here is achieved, valve 1 closes (see function
CLOSE VALVE 1 (7221) on Page 150).
Endress+Hauser
145
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
FIX COMPENSATION
QUANTITY
(7204)
Use this function to specify a positive or negative compensation quantity.
The compensation quantity balances out a constant, system-related incorrect quantity.
This can be caused, for example, by a pump over-running or by the closing time of a
valve. The compensation quantity is determined by the system operator. A negative compensation quantity must be specified for overbatching and a positive compensation quantity for underbatching.
!
Note!
The compensation quantity affects batching quantity only and does not affect the after
run compensation.
User input:
Floating-point number with sign (depends on nominal diameter)
Factory setting:
0 [unit]
!
Note!
• If the entry range is not sufficient for the compensation quantity, the batching quantity
may have to be adjusted.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (ACA), (see
Page 17).
COMPENSATION MODE
(7205)
Use this function to determine whether the after run quantity or a fixed compensation
quantity should be taken into account at the next batching .
Options:
OFF
MODE 1
MODE 2
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
The pressure shock suppression must be switched off if MODE 1 or MODE 2 is selected
in this function (see function PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION (6404) on page 122).
Detailed explanations and information
When batching using the optional software package BATCHING, process-related variable
after run quantities or incorrect quantities can be determined and balanced out (by computer) by means of various functions. This ensures a high level of accuracy throughout
the entire batching range.
• Response when OFF is selected:
The batching ends as soon as the quantity specified in the function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) has been achieved. If after running occurs, this is not recorded and is not
taken into consideration during the next batching. In this way, in the event of processrelated after running, the effective batched quantity is generally larger than the batching quantity specified.
• Response when MODE 1 is selected:
For short batchings and for batching cycles that follow on quickly from one other.
Batching ends before the quantity specified in the function BATCH QUANTITY (7203)
is achieved and the after run quantity is recorded. The exact batching switch-off time
is calculated based on the previous after run quantities.
The number of after run quantities which are to influence the calculation can be specified in the functions AVERAGING DRIP (7207) and CALCULATION MODE (7206).
The after run quantity in MODE 1 is determined between the switch-off point and the
first undershooting of the low flow cut off. Any subsequent fluid movements are not
taken into account.
(continued on next page)
146
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
COMPENSATION MODE
(continued)
• Response when MODE 2 is selected:
For batchings where batching accuracy is vital and where process-related fluctuations
in flow occur during after running. Batching ends before the quantity specified in the
function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) is achieved and the after run quantity is recorded.
The exact batching switch-off time is calculated based on the previous after run quantities.
The number of after run quantities which are to influence the calculation can be specified in the functions AVERAGING DRIP (7207) and CALCULATION MODE (7206).
The after run quantity in MODE 2 is determined between the switch-off point and the
constant undershooting of the low-flow cut off. This means that the lower the setting
is for the low-flow cut off, the longer the after run quantity is recorded. The batching is
very accurate.
F06-x3xxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-015
Example diagram of a batching sequence and the respective response in MODE 1 and
MODE 2:
Q
t1
b
A
a
B
t
s
1
2
3 4
5
C
Q = Flow
t = Time
t1 = time period shorter than or equal to the maximum batching time
A = Coarse batching quantity
B = Fine batching quantity
C = After run quantity
(Effective batching quantity = A + B + C)
1 = Coarse batching starts and valve 2 opens (two-stage batching)
2 = Coarse batching ends / fine batching starts, valve 2 closes, valve 1 opens
3 = Fine batching ends, valve 1 closes (automatically when the specified batching quantity is achieved)
4 = After run quantity recording in MODE 1 ends
5 = After run quantity recording in MODE 2 ends
a = After run quantity recorded in MODE 1
b = After run quantity recorded in MODE 2
s = Low flow cut off
Endress+Hauser
147
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
CALCULATION MODE
(7206)
!
Note!
This function is only available if MODE 1 or MODE 2 was selected in the COMPENSATION MODE function (7205).
Use this function to select the method for calculating the recorded after run quantities.
Options:
ALL
All after run quantities are used in the calculation.
SELECTION
The after run quantities recorded are filtered. The smallest and largest after run quantity
are not taken into account in the calculation (extreme value filter).
Factory setting:
ALL
!
Note!
Machine-related (larger) “extreme values”, occurring especially at start-up, delay correction and distort real reproducibility. By selecting “SELECT”, these “extreme values” are
not taken into account.
Example:
Function CALCULATION MODE (7206) = SELECTION
Function AVERAGING DRIP (7207) = 5
From five after run quantities recorded, the largest and smallest are not used. From the
remaining three after run quantities, an average after run quantity is calculated which is
taken into account at the next batching.
AVERAGING DRIP
(7207)
!
Note!
This function is only available if MODE 1 or MODE 2 is selected in the function COMPENSATION MODE (7205).
Use this function to specify the number of after run quantities (cycles) which are included
in calculating the batching compensation mode, MODE 1 or MODE 2.
!
Note!
The value entered in this function influences the measuring system reaction time.
If you specify:
• a small calculation depth (low value entered) = measuring system reacts quickly to differing amount of after run quantities.
• a large calculation depth (high value entered) = measuring system reacts slowly to
changing after run quantities.
User input:
0...100
Factory setting:
0 [cycles]
148
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ CONFIGURATION
BATCH STAGES
(7208)
Use this function to define the number of batching stages. Batching can be carried out in
several stages, e.g. 2-stage batching with fast and precise batching.
Options:
1-stage (1 valve or 1-stage batching)
2-stage (2 valves or 2-stage batching)
Factory setting:
1-stage (1 valve or 1-stage batching)
!
Note!
• The batching stage selection (number of valves) is directly dependent on the configuration of the outputs. For 2-stage batching two relay outputs must be available in the
measuring device.
• The functions available in the function group VALVE PARAMETER (Page 150) are
dependent on the number of batching stages (number of valves) selected in this function.
INPUT FORMAT
(7209)
Use this function to define the entry format of the quantities for the switch points of the
valves.
Options:
VALUE-INPUT (e.g. 10 [unit])
%-INPUT (e.g. 80 [%])
Factory setting:
VALUE-INPUT
!
Note!
The entry format selected in this function is also used in the function groups VALVE
PARAMETER (Page 150) and SUPERVISION (Page 155).
Endress+Hauser
149
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2.2
Function group VALVE PARAMETER
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
720
⇓
VALVE PARAMETER
722
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ VALVE PARAMETER
The parameters for the switching contacts of up to 2 valves can be set in the following functions.
The number of switching contacts (valves) available, and thus their settings in this group, is defined in the function
BATCH STAGES (7208).
!
Note!
The following functions are only available if at least one batch stage has been selected in the function BATCH SELECTOR
(7200).
OPEN VALVE 1
(7220)
Use this function to specify the quantity value at which contact 1 opens.
This is used as a switch point for valve 1 to output via an assigned output.
The quantity value is entered as a % or as an absolute value, depending on the option in
the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
User input:
0...max. value or 0...100% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] or 0 [%]
!
Note!
• Dynamic tracking for %-data:
If the value is entered as a %, this %-value always refers to the batching quantity (e.g.
70% of a batching quantity of 10 liters = 7 liters).
If the BATCH QUANTITY (7203) is adjusted (reduced/increased), the effective quantity switch point is automatically and dynamically adjusted (e.g. taking 70% and changing the batching quantity from 10 to 20 liters, the quantity switch point is adjusted
from 7 liters to 14 liters).
• Dynamic tracking for value-data:
If you enter value-input, this value is “absolute” for batching quantities that do not
change (e.g. always 7 liters for a batching quantity of 10 liters). If the batching quantity
(7203) is adjusted (reduced/increased), the quantity switch point is automatically and
dynamically adjusted/tracked (e.g. with a new batching quantity changing from 10 to
20 liters, the quantity switch point is adjusted from 7 liters to 14 liters). In other
words, the existing value data is tracked as a percentage of the altered batching quantity.
CLOSE VALVE 1
(7221)
Use this function to display the quantity value at which contact 1 (valve 1) closes. The
quantity value is displayed either as a % or as an absolute value, depending on the option
in the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
User Interface:
Value or 100% (corresponds to the batching quantity)
!
Note!
The switching contact for valve 1 is the “main contact”, i.e. the closing function of valve
1 is firmly assigned to the batching quantity entered, (see function BATCH QUANTITY
(7203) onPage 145). In this way, function CLOSE VALVE 1 is also the basis for calculating the after run quantity.
150
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ VALVE PARAMETER
OPEN VALVE 2
(7222)
Use this function to specify the quantity value at which contact 2 opens.
This is used as a switch point for valve 2 to output via an assigned output.
The quantity value is entered as a % or as an absolute value, depending on the option in
the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
User input:
0...max. value or 0...100% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] or 0 [%]
!
Note!
• Dynamic tracking for %-data:
If the value is entered as a %, this %-value always refers to the batching quantity (e.g.
70% of a batching quantity of 10 liters = 7 liters).
If the BATCH QUANTITY (7203) is adjusted (reduced/increased), the effective quantity switch point is automatically and dynamically adjusted (e.g. taking 70% and changing the batching quantity from 10 to 20 liters, the quantity switch point is adjusted
from 7 liters to 14 liters).
• Dynamic tracking for value-data:
If you enter value-input, this value is “absolute” for batching quantities that do not
change (e.g. always 7 liters for a batching quantity of 10 liters). If the batching quantity
(7203) is adjusted (reduced/increased), the quantity switch point is automatically and
dynamically adjusted/tracked (e.g. with a new batching quantity changing from 10 to
20 liters, the quantity switch point is adjusted from 7 liters to 14 liters). In other
words, the existing value data is tracked as a percentage of the altered batching quantity.
CLOSE VALVE 2
(7223)
Use this function to specify the quantity value at which contact 2 closes.
This is used as a switch point for valve 2 to output via an assigned output.
The quantity value is entered as a % or as an absolute value, depending on the option in
the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
User input:
0...max. value or 0...100% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] or 0 [%]
!
Note!
• Dynamic tracking for %-data:
If the value is entered as a %, this %-value always refers to the batching quantity (e.g.
70% of a batching quantity of 10 kg = 7 kg). If the BATCH QUANTITY (7203) is
adjusted (reduced/increased), the effective quantity switch point is automatically and
dynamically adjusted (e.g. taking 70% and changing the batching quantity from 10 to
20 kg, the quantity switch point is adjusted from 7 kg to 14 kg).
• Dynamic tracking for value-data:
If you enter value-input, this value is “absolute” for batching quantities that do not
change (e.g. always 7 kg for a batching quantity of 10 kg). If the batching quantity
(7203) is adjusted (reduced/increased), the quantity switch point is automatically and
dynamically adjusted/tracked (e.g. with a new batching quantity changing from 10 to
20 kg, the quantity switch point is adjusted from 7 kg to 14 kg). In other words, the
existing value data is tracked as a percentage of the altered batching quantity.
Endress+Hauser
151
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2.3
Examples of setting parameters for batching processes
The two examples in the next section clearly show the effect of different entries and options in the
function group.
Example 1
The first example explains the parameter setting of various functions for carrying out batching and
illustrates how functions are affected when the batching quantity is changed.
The following batching is to take place:
• 2-stage batching with a batching quantity of 10 kg in total.
• Coarse batching quantity of 8 kg. Valve 2 opens at the start of the batching and closes when 8 kg
is achieved.
• Fine batching of 2 kg. Valve 1 opens at the start of the batching and closes (automatically) when
the batching quantity (10 kg) is achieved.
• Once 9 kg have been batched a batching progress message should be generated.
• Value-input should be entered.
v
➁
➂ ➃
t
➀
0
8
V2
9
10
V1
x
v = Flow velocity [m/s]
t = Time
V1 = Valve 1 open
V2 = Valve 2 open
➀ = Start batching/coarse batching, valves 1 (7220) and 2 (7222) open
➁ = Valve 2 (7223) closes, coarse batching quantity achieved
➂ = Batching progress message (7243)
➃ = Valve 1 closes (7221), batching ends
x = After run quantity
The following parameter settings must be made:
– Select the unit for batching:
Function UNIT MASS (0401) Page 17 = kg (kilogram)
– Select the measured variable for batching:
Function ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE (7202) Page 145 = MASS FLOW
– Enter the batching quantity:
Function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) Page 145 = 10 [kg]
– Select the entry format:
Function BATCH STAGES (7208) Page 149 = 2-stage
– Select the entry format:
Function INPUT FORMAT (7209) Page 149 = VALUE-INPUT
– Quantity data for when the first valve should open:
Function OPEN VALVE 1 (7220) Page 150 = 0 [kg]
(valve 1 closes automatically when the batching quantity is achieved = 10 [kg], display in function CLOSE VALVE 1 (7221) Page 150)
152
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
– Quantity data for when the second valve should open:
Function OPEN VALVE 2 (7224) Page 151 = 0 [kg]
– Quantity data for when the second valve should close:
Function CLOSE VALVE 2 (7223) Page 151 = 8 [kg]
– Quantity data for when the message should be generated:
Function PROGRESS NOTE (7243) Page 157 = 9 [kg]
Example 1 a
Batching specifications identical to those in example 1, however the new batching quantity is 20 kg
and the message should be generated once 18 kg are batched.
The following parameters must be set manually:
– Enter the new batching quantity:
Function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) Page 145 = 20 [kg]
– New quantity data for when the message should be generated:
Function PROGRESS NOTE (7243) Page 157 = 18 [kg]
The following functions are automatically adjusted to suit the new batching quantity:
– Function OPEN VALVE 1 = 0 [kg]
– Function OPEN VALVE 2 = 0 [kg]
– Function CLOSE VALVE 2 = 16 [kg]
Example 2
The second example explains the parameter settings of the various functions for batching with the
entry format in % for the switch points of the valves.
The following batching is to take place:
• 2-stage batching with a batching quantity of 15 kg in total.
• Coarse batching quantity from 3 to 12 kg. Valve 2 opens when 20% (3 kg) of the batching quantity
is achieved and closes when 80% (12 kg) is achieved.
• Valve 1 opens at the start of the batching and closes (automatically) when the batching quantity
(15 kg) is achieved.
• %-input should be entered.
v
➂
➁
➃
t
➀
0
3
V2
12
15
V1
x
v = Flow velocity [m/s]
t = Time
V1 = Valve 1 open
V2 = Valve 2 open
➀ = Start batching, valve 1 (7220) opens
➁ = Valve 2 (7222) opens, coarse batching quantity starts
➂ = Valve 2 (7223) closes, coarse batching quantity achieved
➃ = Valve 1 (7221) closes, end of batching
x = After run quantity
Endress+Hauser
153
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
The following parameter settings must be made:
– Select the unit for batching:
Function UNIT MASS (0401) Page 17 = kg (kilogram)
– Select the measured variable for batching:
Function ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE (7202) Page 145 = MASS FLOW
– Enter the batching quantity:
Function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) Page 145 = 15 [kg]
– Select the entry format:
Function BATCH STAGES (7208) Page 149 = 2-stage
– Select the entry format:
Function INPUT FORMAT (7209) Page 149 = %-INPUT
– Percentage data for when the first valve should open:
Function OPEN VALVE 1 (7220) Page 150 = 0 [%]
(Valve 1 closes automatically when the batching quantity is achieved = 15 [kg], display in function CLOSE VALVE 1 (7221) Page 150)
– Percentage data for when the second valve should open:
Function OPEN VALVE 2 (7224) Page 151 = 20 [%] corresponds to 3 kg
– Percentage data for when the second valve should close:
Function CLOSE VALVE 2 (7223) Page 151 = 80 [%] corresponds to 12 kg
Example 2 a
Batching specifications identical to those in example 1, however the new batching quantity is 45 kg.
The following parameters must be set manually :
Enter the new batching quantity:
Function BATCH QUANTITY (7203) Page 145 = 45 [kg]
The following functions are automatically adjusted to suit the new batching quantity:
– Function OPEN VALVE 1 = 0 [%]
– Function OPEN VALVE 2 = 20 [%] corresponds to 9 kg
– Function CLOSE VALVE 2 = 80 [%] corresponds to 36 kg
154
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2.4
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group SUPERVISION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
720
⇓
VALVE PARAMETER
722
⇓
SUPERVISION
724
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ SUPERVISION
MAXIMUM BATCHING
TIME
(7240)
Use this function to specify a maximum batching time.
All valves close once the specified batching time elapses, (see functions CLOSE VALVE
1...2, see Page 150 ff.).
This function can be used for safety reasons, for example, to ensure all batching valves
close in the event of a system fault.
User input:
0...30000 s
Factory setting:
0 s (= deactivated)
"
Caution!
• When the batching quantity is adjusted (reduced/increased), (see function BATCH
QUANTITY (7203) on Page 145) there is no automatic adjustment, i.e. this value must
be determined again and re-entered, (see also fault message # 471 in the Operating
Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, Trouble-shooting Chapter).
• Batching (START) is not possible when the fault message is active!
!
Note!
• The function is not active if you enter 0 s (factory setting).
• This means that the batching valves are not closed by means of this function.
• As a factory setting, this function is assigned a fault message. This appears for 60 seconds. The fault message can be acknowledged earlier by changing a batching function.
• If this function is intended more for general monitoring purposes or if there is a short
time lapse between two batching processes, it is advisable to assign this function to a
notice message, (see function ERROR CATEGORY on Page 174). However, while the
notice message is active (60 seconds) the next batching can be started and the notice
message is acknowledged.
• This function can be output via the switch output.
Endress+Hauser
155
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ SUPERVISION
MINIMUM BATCHING
QUANTITY
(7241)
Use this function to specify a minimum batching quantity. A message is generated if the
minimum batching quantity was not achieved by the time batching ends (e.g. if after run
mode is active). The quantity value is entered either as a % or as an absolute value,
depending on the option in the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
Application:
Message stating that underbatching is present (e.g. the contents of the containers does
not correspond to the quantity declared).
User input:
0...max. value or 0...100% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] (= deactivated)
"
Caution!
• When the batching quantity is adjusted (reduced/increased), (see function BATCH
QUANTITY (7203) on Page 145), there is no automatic adjustment, i.e. this value
must be determined again and re-entered (see also the fault message # 472 in the
Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, Trouble-shooting Chapter).
• Batching (START) is not possible when the fault message is active!
!
Note!
• The function is not active if you enter 0 (factory setting).
• As a factory setting, this function is assigned a fault message. This appears for 60 seconds. The fault message can be acknowledged earlier by changing a batching function.
• If this function is intended more for general monitoring purposes or if there is a short
time lapse between two batching processes, it is advisable to assign this function to a
notice message, (see function ERROR CATEGORY on Page 174). However, while the
notice message is active (60 seconds) the next batching can be started and the notice
message is acknowledged.
• This function can be output via the switch output.
156
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ SUPERVISION
MAXIMUM BATCHING
QUANTITY
(7242)
Use this function to specify a maximum batching quantity. If the maximum batching
quantity is exceeded during batching, all valves are closed, batching is stopped and a message is generated. The quantity value is entered as a % or as an absolute value, depending
on the option in the function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
Application:
To avoid overbatching and thus prevent critical situations caused by fluid overflow arising
in the plant, (e.g. plant standstill caused by safety level switches being triggered, contamination, product loss, etc.).
User input:
0...2 x max. value or 0...200% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] (= deactivated)
"
Caution!
• When the batching quantity is adjusted (reduced/increased), (see function BATCH
QUANTITY ( 7203) on Page 145), there is no automatic adjustment, i.e. this value
must be determined again and re-entered (see also the fault message # 472 in the
Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, Trouble-shooting Chapter).
• Batching (START) is not possible when the fault message is active!
!
Note!
• The function is not active if you enter 0 (factory setting).
• As a factory setting, this function is assigned a fault message. This appears for 60 seconds. The fault message can be acknowledged earlier by changing a batching function.
• If this function is intended more for general monitoring purposes or if there is a short
time lapse between two batching processes, it is advisable to assign this function to a
notice message (see function ERROR CATEGORY on Page 174). However, while the
notice message is active (60 seconds) the next batching can be started and the notice
message is acknowledged.
• This function can be output via the switch output.
PROGRESS NOTE
(7243)
Use this function to define a batching quantity at which a message should be generated.
When the specified batching quantity is achieved, the message is generated and signalled
via the output.
The quantity value is entered as a % or as an absolute value, depending on the selection
in function INPUT FORMAT (7209).
Application:
For longer batching processes when preparing or taking measures related to production
(e.g. preparing to replace container, etc.).
User input:
0...max. value or 0...100% (related to the batching quantity)
Factory setting:
0 [unit] (= deactivated)
"
Caution!
When the batching quantity is adjusted (reduced/increased), (see function BATCH
QUANTITY (7203) on Page 145), there is no automatic adjustment, i.e. this value must
be determined again and re-entered, (see also notice message # 473 in the Operating
Instructions Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, Trouble-shooting Chapter).
!
Note!
• The function is not active if you enter 0 (factory setting).
• This function can be output via the switch output.
• The batching progress message remains active until batching ends.
Endress+Hauser
157
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ SUPERVISION
MAX. FLOW VALUE
(7244)
A maximum flow value can be specified in this function. The batching process is aborted
and all the valves are closed if the specified flow value is overshot.
Application:
This function can be used for safety reasons, for example, to ensure all batching valves
close in the event of a system fault.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0 [Unit] (= deactivated)
! Note!
• The appropriate unit is taken depending on the process variable selected in the
ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE parameter and the unit configured in the SYSTEM UNITS
function group.
• The function is not active if you enter 0 (factory setting).
• If the batching process is aborted because the specified flow value is overshot, the
parameter BATCH COUNTER is not incremented.
• New error message > MAX. FLOW with the error number #474. The error message is
output automatically after 60 s.
In the function ASSIGN PROCESS ERROR (8002), you can use the ERROR CATEGORY
(8003) to define whether this should be treated as a fault or notice message.
Factory setting = FAULT MESSAGE
158
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2.5
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group OPERATION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
720
⇓
VALVE PARAMETER
722
⇓
SUPERVISION
724
⇓
OPERATION
726
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ OPERATION
BATCH PROCEDURE
(7260)
Use this function to control a batching process. The batching can be started manually or a
batching already running can be interrupted or stopped at any time.
Options:
STOP (Stop batching)
START (Start batching)
HOLD (Interrupt batching)
GO ON (Continue batching)
Factory setting:
STOP
!
Note!
• This function can also be controlled via the status input, (see function ASSIGN
STATUS INPUT (5000) on Page 111).
• If the information line has been assigned to BATCHING MENU (see Page 49), the
application-specific functions of the minus key (START-STOP) and the plus key
(HOLD-GO ON / batching specification) are defined locally. In this way, a direct
batching control station is available locally at the measuring device by means of the
user interface (not access-protected).
• In the event of a fault:
– during the batching process, the batching is cancelled (STOP) and the local display
alternates between displaying the batching menu and the fault message.
• If the positive zero return is activated, (see Page 131):
– during the batching process, the batching is cancelled (STOP).
– during a pause in the batching (option HOLD), the batching cannot be restarted,
(see also notice messages # 571 and # 572 in the Operating Instructions Proline
Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en, Chapter Trouble-shooting.
BATCH UPWARDS
(7261)
In this function the batching progress can be read upwards, i.e. starting at 0 the quantity
displayed increases until the batching process is complete.
User Interface:
Floating-point number incl. unit
!
Note!
The value of this function can be output via the current output.
Endress+Hauser
159
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ OPERATION
BATCH DOWNWARDS
(7262)
In this function the batching progress can be read downwards, i.e. starting from the
batching quantity, the quantity displayed decreases until the batching process is complete.
User Interface:
Floating-point number incl. unit
!
Note!
The value of this function can be output via the current output.
BATCH COUNTER
(7263)
Use this function to display the number of batchings carried out.
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number
Factory setting:
0
!
Note!
• The batching quantity totalizer can be reset to 0 via the function RESET SUM/COUNTER (7265).
• This function is reset to 0 (zero) if a different batching specification is selected in the
function BATCH SELECTOR (7200).
BATCH SUM
(7264)
Use this function to display the effective overall total of all the batchings carried out.
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [unit]
!
Note!
• E.g. in 2-stage batching the effective overall total is calculated from the coarse batching
quantity, fine batching quantity and after run quantity.
• The total batching quantity can be reset to 0 via the function RESET SUM/COUNTER
(7265).
• This function is reset to 0 (zero) if a different batching specification is selected in the
function BATCH SELECTOR (7200).
RESET SUM/COUNTER
(7265)
Use this function to reset the batch counter and the batch sum to zero.
User input:
NO
YES
Factory setting:
NO
!
Note!
The batch counter and the batch sum can also be reset via the batching menu (information line on the local display) .
160
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.2.6
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group INFORMATION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
BATCHING FUNCTION
HCA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
720
⇓
VALVE PARAMETER
722
⇓
SUPERVISION
724
⇓
OPERATION
726
⇓
INFORMATION
728
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ INFORMATION
VALVE 1 INTERNAL
SWITCH POINT
(7280)
Use this function to display the internal switch point of valve 1 (see function CLOSE
VALVE 1 (7221) on page 150). The value displayed takes the fixed correction quantity
and / or the calculated after run quantity into account.
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number [unit]
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (ACA), (see
Page 17).
DRIP QUANTITY
(7281)
Displays the after run calculated (averaged) internally.
The value displayed can be overwritten in this function and the after run can thus be
adjusted. The after run quantity is used to optimise the internal switch point of valve 1.
User input:
0...quantity [unit]
!
Note!
The after run, entered in this function, is only used for the first batching process. For the
second and following batching processes, the internally calculated after run will be used
again.
The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (ACA), (see
Page 17).
VALVE 1 CLOSING TIME Use this function to display the valve closing time calculated internally.
(7282)
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number [ms]
!
Note!
• The valve closing time is the period between the switch point of valve 1 and the first
undershooting of the low flow cut off.
• The data can only be taken as a general trend.
Endress+Hauser
161
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ BATCHING FUNCTION ➞ INFORMATION
BATCHING TIME
(7283)
In this function, you can read the batching time for the current or completed batching
process, i.e. starting at 0 seconds, the time displayed increases until the batching process
is complete.
Application:
This BATCHING TIME refers to the batch quantity determined in the OVERALL BATCH.
QTY. function for the current or last batching process.
Batch sum
Batch 2
Batch 1
Batch time
➁
0
t (s)
100
Batch time
0
➁
100
A0001170-EN
User Interface:
max. 7-digit floating-point number
! Note!
• Behaviour when controlling batching process via function BATCH PROCEDURE:
– STOP ⇒ BATCHING TIME is not reset and stays at the current value.
– START ⇒ BATCHING TIME is reset and starts with the value 0
– HOLD ⇒ BATCHING TIME is not reset and stays at the current value.
– GO ON ⇒ BATCHING TIME is not reset and continues updating on the basis of
the last time value
• The BATCHING TIME is also updated during the batching process
162
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3
10.3.1
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Group ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
Function group CONFIGURATION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ CONFIGURATION
REFERENCE CONDITION USER
(7401)
Use this function to start determining the user reference status. The following values are
determined:
• MASS FLOW
• DENSITY
• REFERENCE DENSITY
• TEMPERATURE
• TUBE DAMPING
• ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS
Options:
CANCEL
START
Factory setting:
CANCEL
SELECT REFERENCE
CONDITION
(7402)
Use this function to select the reference status which should be used to compare the
advanced diagnosis parameters (see function ACQUISITION MODE (7410) on
Page 164).
Options:
FACTORY
USER
Factory setting:
FACTORY
WARNING MODE
(7403)
Use this function to determine whether a warning should be generated when there is a
deviation between the reference status (FACTORY or USER, see function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION) and the current measuring values.
The values of the following functions are compared to the reference status :
• ACTUAL VALUE (7421, 7431, 7441, 7451, 7461, 7471)
Options:
OFF
ON
Factory setting:
OFF
Endress+Hauser
163
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.2
Function group ACQUISITION
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ ACQUISITION
ACQUISITION MODE
(7410)
Use this function to specify whether the advanced diagnosis parameters should be determined on a periodical or single-shot basis.
Options:
OFF
PERIODICAL
SINGLE SHOT
Factory setting:
OFF
!
Note!
See the Chapter on “Commissioning” in the Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83,
BA 059D/06/en for more information on advanced diagnosis.
ACQUISITION PERIODE
(7411)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless PERIODICAL was selected in the ACQUISITION
MODE function (7410).
Use this function to specify the time interval after which the advanced diagnosis parameters should be taken. The time intervall starts with the confirmation of the input.
User input:
0...99999 s
Factory setting:
3600 s
!
Note!
A reference status must be defined prior to determining the diagnosis parameters, see
function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION (7402).
ACQUISITION DO
(7412)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless SINGLE SHOT was selected in the ACQUISITION
MODE function (7410).
Use this function to start determining the advanced diagnosis parameters on a single-shot
basis.
Options:
START – CANCEL
Factory setting:
CANCEL
!
Note!
A reference status must be defined prior to determining the diagnosis parameters, see
function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION (7402).
RESET HISTORY
(7413)
Use this function to delete all history values.
Options:
YES – NO
Factory setting:
NO
164
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.3
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group MASS FLOW
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ MASS FLOW
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT MASS FLOW (0400), (see Page 17).
REFERENCE VALUE
(7420)
The reference value for the mass flow appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
ACTUAL VALUE
(7421)
The measured mass flow appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
MINIMUM VALUE
(7422)
The lowest mass flow value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7423)
The highest mass flow value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
HISTORY 1
(7424)
The last ten mass flow values since the saved values were last reset appear on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7425)
This function displays deviation between the measured mass flow and the reference values (FACTORY or USER), see Page 163, selected in the function SELECT REFERENCE
CONDITION (7402).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
WARNING LEVEL
(7426)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE function
(7403).
Use this function to specify a limit value for the mass flow. A notice message is generated
if the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 [Mass flow unit]
Factory setting:
90000 kg/h
Endress+Hauser
165
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.4
Function group DENSITY
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
⇓
DENSITY
743
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ DENSITY
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT DENSITY (0420), (see Page 20).
REFERENCE VALUE
(7430)
The reference value for the density appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
ACTUAL VALUE
(7431)
The measured density appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
MINIMUM VALUE
(7432)
The lowest density value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7433)
The highest density value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
HISTORY 1
(7434)
The last ten density values since the saved values were last reset appear on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7435)
This function displays the deviation between the measured density and the reference values (FACTORY or USER), see Page 163, selected in the function SELECT REFERENCE
CONDITION (7402).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
WARNING LEVEL
(7436)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE function
(7403).
Use this function to specify a limit value for the density. A notice message is generated if
the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 [%]
Factory setting:
100%
166
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.5
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group REFERENCE DENSITY
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
⇓
DENSITY
743
⇓
REFERENCE DENSITY
744
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ REFERENCE DENSITY
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY (0421) ( Page 20).
REFERENCE VALUE
(7440)
The reference value for the reference density appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
ACTUAL VALUE
(7441)
The measured reference density appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
MINIMUM VALUE
(7442)
The lowest reference density value since the saved values were last reset appears on the
display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7443)
The highest reference density value since the saved values were last reset appears on the
display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
HISTORY 1
(7444)
The last ten reference density values since the saved values were last reset appear on the
display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7445)
This function displays the deviation between the measured reference density and the reference values (FACTORY or USER), seePage 163, selected in the function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION (7402).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, incl. units
WARNING LEVEL
(7446)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE function
(7403).
Use this function to specify a limit value for the reference density. A notice message is
generated if the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 [%]
Factory setting:
100%
Endress+Hauser
167
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.6
Function group TEMPERATURE
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
⇓
DENSITY
743
⇓
REFERENCE DENSITY
744
⇓
TEMPERATURE
745
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ TEMPERATURE
!
Note!
The appropriate unit is taken from the function UNIT TEMPERATURE (0422), (see Page 21).
REFERENCE VALUE
(7450)
The reference value for the temperature appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
ACTUAL VALUE
(7451)
The currently measured temperature appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
MINIMUM VALUE
(7452)
The lowest temperature value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7453)
The highest temperature value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
HISTORY 1
(7454)
The last ten temperature values since the saved values were last reset appear on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7455)
This function displays the deviation between the currently measured temperature and the
reference values (FACTORY or USER), see Page 163, selected in the function SELECT
REFERENCE CONDITION (7402).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number, including unit and sign
WARNING LEVEL
(7456)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE (7403)
function.
Use this function to specify a limit value for the temperature. A notice message is generated if the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 °C
Factory setting:
100 °C
168
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.7
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function group TUBE DAMPING
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
⇓
DENSITY
743
⇓
REFERENCE DENSITY
744
⇓
TEMPERATURE
745
⇓
TUBE DAMPING
746
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ TUBE DAMPING
REFERENCE VALUE
(7460)
The reference value for tube damping appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
ACTUAL VALUE
(7461)
The measured tube damping appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
MINIMUM VALUE
(7462)
The lowest tube damping value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7463)
The highest tube damping value since the saved values were last reset appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
HISTORY 1
(7464)
The last ten tube damping values since the saved values were last reset appears on the
display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7465)
This function displays the deviation between the measured tube damping and the reference values (FACTORY or USER), see Page 163, selected in the function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION (7402).
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
WARNING LEVEL
(7466)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE function
(7403).
Use this function to specify a limit value for tube damping. A notice message is generated
if the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 [%]
Factory setting:
1000%
Endress+Hauser
169
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10.3.8
Function group ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS
SPECIAL FUNCTION H
⇒
ADVAN. DIAGNOSTICS HEA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
740
⇓
ACQUISITION
741
⇓
MASS FLOW
742
⇓
DENSITY
743
⇓
REFERENCE DENSITY
744
⇓
TEMPERATURE
745
⇓
TUBE DAMPING
746
⇓
EL.-DYN. SENSORS
747
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS
REFERENCE VALUE
(7470)
The reference value for the electrodynamic sensors appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
ACTUAL VALUE
(7471)
The measuring values for the electrodynamic sensors appear on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
MINIMUM VALUE
(7472)
The lowest value of the electrodynamic sensors since the saved values were last reset
appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
MAXIMUM VALUE
(7473)
The highest value of the electrodynamic sensors since the saved values were last reset
appears on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
HISTORY 1
(7474)
The last ten values of the electrodynamic sensors since the saved values were last reset
appear on the display.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
170
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
10 Block SPECIAL FUNCTION
Function description
SPECIAL FUNCTION ➞ ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ➞ ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS
ACTUAL DEVIATION
(7475)
This function displays the deviation between the measuring values for the electrodynamic
sensors and the reference values (FACTORY or USER), see Page 163, selected in the
function SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION (7402) is displayed.
User Interface:
5-digit floating-point number
WARNING LEVEL
(7476)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless ON was selected in the WARNING MODE function
(7403).
Use this function to specify a limit value for the electrodynamic sensors. A notice message
is generated if the limit value is exceeded.
User input:
0...99999 [%]
Factory setting:
100%
Endress+Hauser
171
172
SUPERVISION
⇒
(J)
Block
(JAA) P. 173
SYSTEM
Groups
⇒
⇐
(JCA) P. 178
VERSION INFO
⇒
⇒
(810) P. 178
DEVICE
(804) P. 176
OPERATION
⇒
⇐
(820) P. 178
SENSOR
⇒
⇐
AMPLIFIER
⇒
⇐
(824) P. 180
F-CHIP
⇒
⇐
(830) P. 180
I/O MODULE
⇒
I/O SUB
MODULE 2
(834) P. 180
⇒
I/O SUB
MODULE 4
(838) P. 180
⇓⇑
⇒
I/O SUB
MODULE 3
(836) P. 180
⇓⇑
⇓⇑
⇒
⇒
⇐
I/O SUB
MODULE 1
(832) P. 180
⇒
⇒
⇒
(8380) P. 181
SUB-I/O TYPE
(8360) P. 181
SUB-I/O TYPE
(8340) P. 181
SUB-I/O TYPE
(8320) P. 181
SUB-I/O TYPE
I/O MODULE
TYPE
(8300) P. 180
STATUS
F-CHIP
(8240) P. 180
SW REV. NO.
AMPLIFIER
(8222) P. 179
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
SERIAL NUMBER
⇒
(8200) P. 178
SW.- REV.
SUB-I/O
(8383) P. 181
SW.- REV.
SUB-I/O
(8363) P. 181
SW.- REV.
SUB-I/O
(8343) P. 181
SW.- REV.
SUB-I/O
(8323) P. 181
SW REV.
I/O MODULE
(8303) P. 180
SYSTEM OPTION
(8241) P. 180
SW REV. NO.
T DAT
(8225) P. 179
(8201) P. 178
SENSOR TYPE
SW REV. NO.
F CHIP
(8244) P. 180
LANGUAGE
GROUP
(8226) P. 179
SW-REV.-NO. SDAT
(8205) P. 178
SIM. FAILSAFE
MODE
(8042) P. 176
ASSIGN PROC.
ERROR
(8002) P. 173
SIM. MEASURAND
(8043) P. 176
ERROR CATEGORY
(8003) P. 174
VAL. SIM. MEASURAND
(8044) P. 177
ACKNOWL.
FAULTS
(8004) P. 174
SYSTEM RESET
(8046) P. 177
(8005) P. 174
ALARM DELAY
Functions
OPERATION
HOURS
(8048) P. 177
REMOVE
SW-OPTION
(8006) P. 175
11
(822) P. 179
⇒
DEVICE SOFTWARE
(8100) P. 178
ERROR CATEGORY
(8001) P. 173
⇒
⇒
PREV. SYST. CONACT. SYST. CONDITION
DITION
⇒
(8041) P. 176
(8040) P. 176
ASSIGN SYS.
ERROR
(8000) P. 173
⇒
CONFIGURATION
⇒
(800) P. 173
⇒
⇐
⇓⇑
⇒
Function
groups
11 Block SUPERVISION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Block SUPERVISION
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11 Block SUPERVISION
11.1
Group SYSTEM
11.1.1
Function group CONFIGURATION
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
800
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ SYSTEM ➞ CONFIGURATION
ASSIGN SYSTEM
ERROR
(8000)
Use this function to view all system errors. By selecting a certain system error, its error
category can be changed in the subsequent function ERROR CATEGORY (8001).
Options:
CANCEL
List of system errors
!
Note!
• You can exit this function as follows: select “CANCEL” and confirm with F.
• A list of possible system errors is provided in the Operating Instruction
Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en
ERROR CATEGORY
(8001)
!
Note!
This function is only available if a system error has been selected in the function ASSIGN
SYSTEM ERROR (8000).
Use this function to define whether a system error triggers a notice message or a fault
message. If you select FAULT MESSAGES, all outputs respond to an error in accordance
with their defined error response patterns.
Options:
NOTICE MESSAGES (display only)
FAULT MESSAGES (outputs and display)
!
Note!
Press the key F twice to call up the function ASSIGN SYSTEM ERROR (8000).
ASSIGN PROCESS
ERROR
(8002)
Use this function to view all process errors. By selecting an individual process error, its
error category can be changed in the subsequent function ERROR CATEGORY (8003).
Options:
CANCEL
List of process errors
!
Note!
• You can exit this function as follows: select “CANCEL” and confirm with F.
• A list of possible process errors is provided in the Operating Instruction
Proline Promass 83, BA 059D/06/en
Endress+Hauser
173
11 Block SUPERVISION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ SYSTEM ➞ CONFIGURATION
ERROR CATEGORY
(8003)
!
Note!
This function is only available if a process error has been selected in the function ASSIGN
PROCESS ERROR (8002).
Use this function to define whether a process error triggers a notice message or a fault
message. If you select FAULT MESSAGES, all outputs respond to an error in accordance
with their defined error response patterns.
Options:
NOTICE MESSAGES (display only)
FAULT MESSAGES (outputs and display)
!
Note!
Press the key F twice to call up the function ASSIGN PROCESS ERROR (8002).
ACKNOWLEDGE
FAULTS
(8004)
Use this function to define the measuring device's response to fault messages.
Options:
OFF
The measuring device resumes normal operation when the fault is rectified. The fault
message disappears automatically.
ON
The measuring device resumes normal operation when the fault is rectified. The fault
message is shown on the local display until the message is acknowledged by pressing the
F key.
Factory setting:
OFF
ALARM DELAY
(8005)
Use this function to define a time span for which the criteria for an error have to be satisfied without interruption before a fault or notice message is generated.
Depending on the setting and the type of error, this suppression acts on:
• Display
• Current output
• Frequency output
• Relay output
User input:
0...100 s (in steps of one second)
Factory setting:
0s
"
Caution!
If this function is activated, fault and notice messages are delayed by the time corresponding to the setting before being transmitted to the higher-order controller (process controller, etc.). It is therefore imperative to check in advance in order to make sure whether a
delay of this nature could affect the safety requirements of the process. If fault and notice
messages may not be suppressed, a value of 0 seconds must be entered here.
174
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11 Block SUPERVISION
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ SYSTEM ➞ CONFIGURATION
REMOVE
SW-OPTION
(8006)
! Note!
This function is only available if:
• The F-CHIP software options were saved beforehand
• The F-CHIP is not located on the I/O board of the measuring device
Deletes all F-CHIP software options, such as batching, density functions, etc.
The measuring device is restarted after the software options have been deleted.
Options:
0 = NO
1 = YES
Factory setting: NO
"
Caution!
If process variables which are only available via the F-CHIP software options are assigned
to the local display or the outputs, these have to be reconfigured.
If reconfiguration does not take place, the local display and the totalizer are set to the
factory setting and the outputs are set to OFF.
Endress+Hauser
175
11 Block SUPERVISION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11.1.2
Function group OPERATION
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇒
CONFIGURATION
800
⇓
OPERATION
804
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ SYSTEM ➞ OPERATION
ACTUAL SYSTEM CONDITION
(8040)
Use this function to check the present system condition.
PREVIOUS SYSTEM
CONDITION
(8041)
Use this function to view the fifteen most recent fault and notice messages since measuring last started.
User Interface:
“SYSTEM OK” or the fault / notice message with the highest priority.
User Interface:
The 15 most recent fault or notice messages.
SIMULATION FAILSAFE
MODE
(8042)
Use this function to set all inputs, outputs and totalizers to their defined failsafe modes, in
order to check whether they respond correctly. During this time, the message “SIMULATION FAILSAFE MODE” appears on the display.
Options:
ON
OFF
Factory setting:
OFF
SIMULATION
MEASURAND
(8043)
Use this function to set all inputs, outputs and totalizers to their defined flow-response
modes, in order to check whether they respond correctly. During this time, the message
“SIMULATION MEASURAND” appears on the display.
Options:
OFF
MASS FLOW
VOLUME FLOW
CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW
DENSITY
REFERENCE DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
Factory setting:
OFF
"
Caution!
• The measuring device cannot be used for measuring while this simulation is in
progress.
• The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
176
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11 Block SUPERVISION
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ SYSTEM ➞ OPERATION
VALUE SIMULATION
MEASURAND
(8044)
!
Note!
The function is not visible unless the function SIMULATION MEASURAND (8043) is
active.
Use this function to define a freely selectable value (e.g. 12 m3/s). This is used to test the
associated functions in the device itself and downstream signal loops.
User input:
5-digit floating-point number [unit]
Factory setting:
0 [unit]
"
Caution!
• The setting is not saved if the power supply fails.
• The appropriate unit is taken from the function group SYSTEM UNITS (ACA), (see
Page 17).
SYSTEM RESET
(8046)
Use this function to perform a reset of the measuring system.
Options:
NO
RESTART SYSTEM (restart without interrupting power supply)
Factory setting:
NO
OPERATION HOURS
(8048)
The hours of operation of the device appear on the display.
Display:
Depends on the number of hours of operation elapsed:
Hours of operation < 10 hours → display format = 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
Hours of operation 10...10,000 hours → display format = 0000:00 (hr:min)
Hours of operation > 10,000 hours → display format = 000000 (hr)
Endress+Hauser
177
11 Block SUPERVISION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11.2
Group VERSION INFO
11.2.1
Function group DEVICE
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
DEVICE
810
DEVICE
810
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ DEVICE
DEVICE SOFTWARE
(8100)
11.2.2
Displays the current device software version.
Function group SENSOR
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
⇓
SENSOR
820
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ SENSOR
178
SERIAL NUMBER
(8200)
Use this function to view the serial number of the sensor.
SENSOR TYPE
(8201)
Use this function to view the sensor type (e.g. Promass F).
SOFTWARE
REVISION NUMBER
S-DAT
(8205)
Use this function to view the software revision number of the software used to create the
content of the S-DAT.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11 Block SUPERVISION
11.2.3
Function group AMPLIFIER
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
DEVICE
810
⇓
SENSOR
820
⇓
AMPLIFIER
822
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ AMPLIFIER
SOFTWARE
REVISION NUMBER
AMPLIFIER
(8222)
Use this function to view the software revision number of the amplifier.
SOFTWARE
REVISION NUMBER
T-DAT
(8225)
Use this function to view the software revision number of the software used to create the
content of the T-DAT.
LANGUAGE GROUP
(8226)
Use this function to view the language group.
The following language groups can be ordered: WEST EU / USA, EAST EU / SCAND.,
ASIA , CHINA.
Display:
available language group
!
Note!
• The language options of the available language group are displayed in the LANGUAGE
(2000) function.
• You can change the language group via the configuration software ToF Tool-Fieldtool
Package. Please do not hesitate to contact your E+H sales office if you have any questions.
Endress+Hauser
179
11 Block SUPERVISION
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11.2.4
Function group F-CHIP
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
DEVICE
810
⇓
SENSOR
820
⇓
AMPLIFIER
822
⇓
F-CHIP
824
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ F-CHIP
STATUS F-CHIP
(8240)
Use this function to check whether an F-CHIP is installed and which software options are
available.
SYSTEM OPTION
(8241)
!
Note!
This function is not available unless the measuring device is equipped an
F-CHIP.
The software options available in the measuring device appear on the display.
SOFTWARE REVISION
NUMBER F-CHIP
(8244)
!
Note!
The F-CHIP must be available in order to access this function.
Use this function to view the software revision number of the F-CHIP.
11.2.5
Function group I/O MODULE
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
DEVICE
810
⇓
SENSOR
820
⇓
AMPLIFIER
822
⇓
F-CHIP
824
⇓
I/O MODULE
830
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ I/O MODULE
180
I/O MODULE TYPE
(8300)
Use this function to view the configuration of the I/O module complete with terminal
numbers.
SOFTWARE
REVISION NUMBER
I/O MODULE
(8303)
Use this function to view the software revision number of the I/O module.
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
11 Block SUPERVISION
11.2.6
Function groups IN-/OUTPUT 1...4
SUPERVISION
J
⇒
SYSTEM
JAA
⇓
VERSION INFO
JCA
⇒
DEVICE
810
⇓
SENSOR
820
⇓
AMPLIFIER
822
⇓
F-CHIP
822
⇓
I/O MODULE
830
⇓
I/O SUBMODUL 1
832
⇓
I/O SUBMODUL 2
834
⇓
I/O SUBMODUL 3
836
⇓
I/O SUBMODUL 4
838
Function description
SUPERVISION ➞ VERSION INFO ➞ I/O SUBMODUL 1...4
Endress+Hauser
SUB-I/O TYPE:
1 = (8320)
2 = (8340)
3 = (8360)
4 = (8380)
Use this function to view the configuration complete with terminal numbers.
SOFTWARE
REVISION NUMBER
SUB-I/O TYPE:
1 = (8323)
2 = (8343)
3 = (8363)
4 = (8383)
Use this function to view the software revision umber of the corresponding submodule.
181
12 Factory settings
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
12
Factory settings
12.1
SI units (not for USA and Canada)
12.1.1
Low flow cut off, full scale value, pulse value
Nominal
diameter
Low flow cut off
Full scale value
Pulse value
[mm]
(approx. v = 0.04 m/s)
(approx. v = 2.0 m/s)
(approx. 2 pulse/s at 2.0 m/s)
1
0.08
kg/h
4
kg/h
0.001
kg/p
2
0.40
kg/h
20
kg/h
0.010
kg/p
4
1.80
kg/h
90
kg/h
0.010
kg/p
8
8.00
kg/h
400
kg/h
0.100
kg/p
15
26.00
kg/h
1300
kg/h
0.100
kg/p
15 FB
72.00
kg/h
3600
kg/h
1.000
kg/p
kg/p
25
72.00
kg/h
3600
kg/h
1.000
25 FB
180.00
kg/h
9000
kg/h
1.000
kg/p
40
180.00
kg/h
9000
kg/h
1.000
kg/p
40 FB
300.00
kg/h
15000
kg/h
10.000
kg/p
50
300.00
kg/h
15000
kg/h
10.000
kg/p
80
720.00
kg/h
36000
kg/h
10.000
kg/p
100
1200.00
kg/h
60000
kg/h
10.000
kg/p
150
2600.00
kg/h
130000
kg/h
100.000
kg/p
250
7200.00
kg/h
360000
kg/h
100.000
kg/p
DN 15, 25, 40 “FB” = Full bore versions Promass I
12.1.2
Language
Country
Australia
Austria
Belgium
China
Czech Republic
Denmark
England
Finland
France
Germany
Hong Kong
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Instruments International
Italy
Japan
Malaysia
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
182
Language
English
Deutsch
English
Chinese
Czech
English
English
Suomi
Francais
Deutsch
English
English
English
Bahasa Indonesia
English
Italiano
Japanese
English
Nederlands
Norsk
Polish
Portuguese
Russian
English
English
Espanol
Svenska
Deutsch
English
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
12 Factory settings
12.1.3
Density, length, temperature
Unit
Density
kg/l
Length
mm
Temperature
°C
12.2
US units (only for USA and Canada)
12.2.1
Low flow cut off, full scale value, pulse value
Nominal
diameter
Low flow cut off
Full scale value
Pulse value
[mm]
(approx. v = 0.04 m/s)
(approx. v = 2.0 m/s)
(approx. 2 pulse/s at 2.0 m/s)
1
0.003
lb/min
0.15
lb/min
0.002
lb/p
2
0.015
lb/min
0.75
lb/min
0.020
lb/p
4
0.066
lb/min
3.30
lb/min
0.020
lb/p
8
0.300
lb/min
15.00
lb/min
0.200
lb/p
15
1.000
lb/min
50.00
lb/min
0.200
lb/p
15 FB
2.600
lb/min
130.00
lb/min
2.000
lb/p
25
2.600
lb/min
130.00
lb/min
2.000
lb/p
25 FB
6.600
lb/min
330.00
lb/min
2.000
lb/p
40
6.600
lb/min
330.00
lb/min
2.000
lb/p
40 FB
11.000
lb/min
550.00
lb/min
20.000
lb/p
50
11.000
lb/min
550.00
lb/min
20.000
lb/p
80
26.000
lb/min
1300.00
lb/min
20.000
lb/p
100
44.000
lb/min
2200.00
lb/min
20.000
lb/p
150
95.000
lb/min
4800.00
lb/min
200.000
lb/p
250
260.000
lb/min
13000.00
lb/min
200.000
lb/p
DN 15, 25, 40 “FB” = Full bore versions Promass I
12.2.2
Language, density, length, temperature
Unit
Endress+Hauser
Language
English
Density
g/cc
Length
INCH
Temperature
°F
183
12 Factory settings
184
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Index function matrix
Index function matrix
Blocks
A = MEASURED VARIABLES 11
B = QUICK SETUP 25
C = USER INTERFACE 34
D = TOTALIZER 55
E = OUTPUT 60
F = INPUT 110
G = BASIC FUNCTION 118
H = SPECIAL FUNCTION 137
J = SUPERVISION 172
Groups
AAA = MEASURING VALUES 12
ACA = SYSTEM UNITS 17
AEA = SPECIAL UNITS 22
CAA = CONTROL 35
CCA = MAIN LINE 39
CEA = ADDITIONAL LINE 43
CGA = INFORMATION LINE 49
DAA = TOTALIZER 1 56
DAB = TOTALIZER 2 56
DAC = TOTALIZER 3 56
DJA = HANDLING TOTALIZER 59
EAA = CURRENT OUTPUT 1 61
EAB = CURRENT OUTPUT 2 61
EAC = CURRENT OUTPUT 3 61
ECA = PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT 1 73
ECB = PULSE/FREQUENCY OUTPUT 2 73
EGA = RELAY OUTPUT 1 100
EGB = RELAY OUTPUT 2 100
FAA = STATUS INPUT 111
FCA = CURRENT INPUT 114
GAA = HART 119
GIA = PROCESS PARAMETER 121
GLA = SYSTEM PARAMETER 131
GNA = SENSOR DATA 133
HAA = DENSITY FUNCTIONS 138
HCA = BATCHING FUNCTION 144
HEA = ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS 163
JAA = SYSTEM 173
JCA = VERSION INFO 178
Function groups
000 = MAIN VALUES 12
002 = ADDITIONAL VALUES 13
040 = CONFIGURATION 17
042 = ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION 20
060 = ARBITRARY UNIT 22
200 = BASIC CONFIGURATION 35
202 = UNLOCKING/LOCKING 37
204 = OPERATION 38
220 = CONFIGURATION 39
222 = MULTIPLEX 41
240 = CONFIGURATION 43
242 = MULTIPLEX 46
260 = CONFIGURATION 49
Endress+Hauser
262 = MULTIPLEX 52
300 = CONFIGURATION 56
304 = OPERATION 58
400 = CONFIGURATION 61
404 = OPERATION 71
408 = INFORMATION 72
420 = CONFIGURATION 73
430 = OPERATION 95
438 = INFORMATION 99
470 = CONFIGURATION 100
474 = OPERATION 104
478 = INFORMATION 106
500 = CONFIGURATION 111
504 = OPERATION 112
508 = INFORMATION 113
520 = CONFIGURATION 114
524 = OPERATION 116
528 = INFORMATION 117
600 = CONFIGURATION 119
604 = INFORMATION 120
640 = CONFIGURATION 121
642 = EPD PARAMETER 123
646 = REFERENCE PARAMETER 125
648 = ADJUSTMENT 127
650 = PRESSURE CORRECTION 130
660 = CONFIGURATION 131
680 = CONFIGURATION 133
684 = FLOW COEFFICIENT 134
685 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT 135
686 = ADDITIONAL COEFFICIENT 136
700 = CONFIGURATION 138
720 = CONFIGURATION 144
722 = VALVE PARAMETER 150
724 = SUPERVISION 155
726 = OPERATION 159
728 = INFORMATION 161
740 = CONFIGURATION 163
741 = ACQUISITION 164
742 = MASS FLOW 165
743 = DENSITY 166
744 = REFERENCE DENSITY 167
745 = TEMPERATURE 168
746 = TUBE DAMPING 169
747 = ELECTRODYNAMIC SENSORS 170
800 = CONFIGURATION 173
804 = OPERATION 176
810 = GERÄT 178
820 = SENSOR 178
822 = AMPLIFIER 179
824 = F-CHIP 180
830 = I/O MODULE 180
832 = INPUT/OUTPUT 1 181
834 = INPUT/OUTPUT 2 181
836 = INPUT/OUTPUT 3 181
838 = INPUT/OUTPUT 4 181
185
Index function matrix
Functions 0...
0000 = MASS FLOW 12
0001 = VOLUME FLOW 12
0004 = CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW 12
0005 = DENSITY 12
0006 = REFERENCE DENSITY 12
0008 = TEMPERATURE 12
0009 = PRESSURE 12
0020 = TARGET MASS FLOW 13
0021 = % TARGET MASS FLOW 13
0022 = TARGET VOLUME FLOW 13
0023 = % TARGET VOLUME FLOW 13
0024 = CORRECTED TARGET VOLUME FLOW 14
0025 = CARRIER MASS FLOW 14
0026 = % CARRIER MASS FLOW 14
0027 = CARRIER VOLUME FLOW 14
0028 = % CARRIER VOLUME FLOW 15
0029 = CORRECTED CARRIER VOL. FLOW 15
0030 = % BLACK LIQUOR 15
0031 = ° BAUME 15
0033 = ° API 15
0034 = ° PLATO 16
0035 = ° BALLING 16
0036 = ° BRIX 16
0037 = OTHER 16
0400 = UNIT MASS FLOW 17
0401 = UNIT MASS 17
0402 = UNIT VOLUME FLOW 18
0403 = UNIT VOLUME 18
0404 = UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW 19
0405 = UNIT CORRECTED VOLUME 19
0420 = UNIT DENSITY 20
0421 = UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY 20
0422 = UNIT TEMPERATURE 21
0424 = UNIT LENGTH 21
0426 = UNIT PRESSURE 21
0600 = TEXT ARABITRARY MASS 22
0601 = FACTOR ARBITRARY MASS 22
0602 = TEXT ARBITRARY VOLUME 23
0603 = FACTOR ARBITRARY VOLUME 23
0604 = TEXT ARBITRARY DENSITY 23
0605 = FACTOR ARBITRARY DENSITY 23
0606 = TEXT ARBITRARY CONCENTRATION 24
0607 = FACTOR ARBITRARY CONCENTRATION 24
1...
1002 = QUICK SETUP COMMISSION 25
1003 = QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW 25
1004 = QUICK SETUP GAS MEASUREMENT 25
1005 = QUICK SETUP BATCHING/DOSING 26
1009 = T DAT SAVE/LOAD 26
2...
2000 = LANGUAGE 35
2002 = DISPLAY DAMPING 35
2003 = CONTRAST LCD 36
2004 = BACKLIGHT 36
2020 = ACCESS CODE 37
2021 = DEFINE PRIVATE CODE 37
186
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
2022 = STATUS ACCESS 37
2023 = CODE EINGABEZÄHLER 37
2040 = TEST DISPLAY 38
2200 = ASSIGN 39
2201 = 100% VALUE 40
2202 = FORMAT 40
2220 = ASSIGN 41
2221 = 100% VALUE 42
2222 = FORMAT 42
2400 = ASSIGN 43
2401 = 100% VALUE 44
2402 = FORMAT 45
2403 = DISPLAY MODE 45
2420 = ASSIGN 46
2421 = 100% VALUE 47
2422 = FORMAT 48
2423 = DISPLAY MODE 48
2600 = ASSIGN 49
2601 = 100% VALUE 50
2602 = FORMAT 51
2603 = DISPLAY MODE 51
2620 = ASSIGN 52
2621 = 100% VALUE 53
2622 = FORMAT 54
2623 = DISPLAY MODE 54
3...
3000 = ASSIGN 56
3001 = UNIT TOTALIZER 57
3002 = TOTALIZER MODE 57
3003 = RESET TOTALIZER 57
3040 = SUM 58
3041 = OVERFLOW 58
3800 = RESET ALL TOTALIZERS 59
3801 = FAILSAFE ALL TOTALIZERS 59
4...
4000 = ASSIGN CURRENT OUTPUT 61
4001 = CURRENT SPAN 63
4002 = VALUE 0_4 mA 64
4003 = VALUE 20 mA 66
4004 = MEASURING MODE 67
4005 = TIME CONSTANT 69
4006 = FAILSAFE MODE 70
4040 = ACTUAL CURRENT 71
4041 = SIMULATION CURRENT 71
4042 = VALUE SIMULATION CURRENT 71
4080 = TERMINAL NUMBER 72
4200 = OPERATION MODE 73
4201 = ASSIGN FREQUENCY 74
4202 = START VALUE FREQUENCY 75
4203 = END VALUE FREQUENCY 75
4204 = VALUE F LOW 76
4205 = VALUE F HIGH 76
4206 = MEASURING MODE 78
4207 = OUTPUT SIGNAL 80
4208 = TIME CONSTANT 83
4209 = FAILSAFE MODE 83
4211 = FAILSAFE VALUE 83
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
4221 = ASSIGN PULSE 84
4222 = PULSE VALUE 84
4223 = PULSE WIDTH 85
4225 = MEASURING MODE 86
4226 = OUTPUT SIGNAL 87
4227 = FAILSAFE MODE 90
4241 = ASSIGN STATUS 91
4242 = ON-VALUE 92
4243 = SWITCH-ON DELAY 92
4244 = OFF-VALUE 93
4245 = SWITCH-OFF DELAY 93
4246 = MEASURING MODE 94
4247 = TIME CONSTANT 94
4301 = ACTUAL FREQUENCY 95
4302 = SIMULATION FREQUENCY 95
4303 = VALUE SIMULATION FREQUENCY 96
4322 = SIMULATION PULSE 97
4323 = VALUE SIMULATION PULSE 97
4341 = ACTUAL STATUS 98
4342 = SIMULATION SWITCH POINT 98
4343 = VALUE SIMULATION SWITCH POINT 98
4380 = TERMINAL NUMBER 99
4700 = ASSIGN RELAY 100
4701 = ON-VALUE 101
4702 = SWITCH-ON DELAY 102
4703 = OFF-VALUE 102
4704 = SWITCH-OFF DELAY 102
4705 = MEASURING MODE 103
4706 = TIME CONSTANT 103
4740 = ACTUAL STATUS RELAY 104
4741 = SIMULATION SWITCH POINT 104
4742 = VALUE SIMULATION SWITCH POINT 105
4780 = TERMINAL NUMBER 106
5...
5000 = ASSIGN STATUS INPUT 111
5001 = ACTIVE LEVEL 111
5002 = MINIMUM PULSE WIDTH 111
5040 = ACTUAL STATUS INPUT 112
5041 = SIMULATION STATUS INPUT 112
5042 = VALUE SIMULATION STATUS INPUT 112
5080 = TERMINAL NUMBER 113
5200 = ASSIGN CURRENT INPUT 114
5201 = CURRENT SPAN 114
5202 = VALUE O_4 mA 114
5203 = VALUE 2O mA 115
5204 = FAILSAFE MODE 115
5240 = ACTUAL CURRENT INPUT 116
5241 = SIMULATION CURRENT INPUT 116
5242 = VALUE SIMULATION CURRENT INPUT 116
5245 = TERMINAL NUMBER 117
6...
6000 = TAG NAME 119
6001 = TAG DESCRIPTION 119
6002 = BUS ADDRESS 119
6003 = HART PROTOCOL 119
6004 = WRITE PROTECTION 119
6040 = MANUFACTURER ID 120
Endress+Hauser
Index function matrix
6041 = DEVICE ID 120
6400 = ASSIGN LOW FLOW CUT OFF 121
6402 = ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF 121
6403 = OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF 121
6404 = PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION 122
6420 = EMPTY PIPE DETECTION 123
6423 = EPD VALUE LOW 123
6424 = EPD VALUE HIGH 123
6425 = EPD RESPONSE TIME 123
6460 = CORRECTED VOLUME CALCULATION 125
6461 = FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY 125
6462 = EXPANSION COEFFICIENT LINEAR 125
6463 = EXPANSION COEFFICIENT SQUARE 125
6464 = REFERENCE TEMPERATURE 126
6480 = ZEROPOINT ADJUST 127
6482 = DENSITY ADJUST MODE 128
6483 = DENSITY SETPOINT 1 128
6484 = MEASURE FLUID 1 128
6485 = DENSITY SETPOINT 2 128
6486 = MEASURE FLUID 2 128
6487 = DENSITY ADJUST 129
6488 = RESTORE ORIGINAL 129
6500 = PRESSURE MODE 130
6501 = PRESSURE 130
6600 = INSTALLATION DIRECTION SENSOR 131
6602 = DENSITY DAMPING 131
6603 = SYSTEM DAMPING 131
6605 = POSITIVE ZERO RETURN 131
6606 = TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 132
6800 = K-FACTOR 133
6803 = ZERO POINT 133
6804 = NOMINAL DIAMETER 133
6840 = TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KM 134
6841 = TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KM 2 134
6842 = TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT KT 134
6843 = CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT KD 1 134
6844 = CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT KD 2 134
6850 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 0 135
6851 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 1 135
6852 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 2 135
6853 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 3 135
6854 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 4 135
6855 = DENSITY COEFFICIENT C 5 135
6860 = MINIMAL TEMP. MEASURED 136
6861 = MAXIMAL TEMP. MEASURED 136
6862 = MINIMAL TEMP. CARRIER TUBE 136
6863 = MAXIMAL TEMP. CARRIER TUBE 136
7...
7000 = DENSITY FUNCTION 138
7001 = REFERENCE DENSITY CARRIER FLUID 138
7002 = EXPANSION COEFF. LIN. CARRIER FLUID 138
7003 = EXPANSION COEFF. SQR. CARRIER FLUID 139
7004 = REFERENCE DENSITY TARGET FLUID 139
7005 = EXPANSION COEFF. LIN. TARGET FLUID 139
7006 = EXPANSION COEFF. SQR. TARGET FLUID 140
7007 = LINEAR EXPANSION COEFFICIENT 140
7008 = SQUARE EXPANSION COEFFICIENT 140
7009 = REFERENCE TEMPERATURE 141
187
Index function matrix
7021 = MODE 141
7022 = CONCENTRATION SELECTOR 142
7031 = CONCENTRATION NAME 142
7032 = COEFFICIENT A0 142
7033 = COEFFICIENT A1 142
7034 = COEFFICIENT A2 143
7035 = COEFFICIENT A3 143
7036 = COEFFICIENT A4 143
7037 = COEFFICIENT B1 143
7038 = COEFFICIENT B2 143
7039 = COEFFICIENT B3 143
7200 = BATCH SELECTOR 144
7201 = BATCH NAME 144
7202 = ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE 145
7203 = BATCH QUANTITY 145
7204 = FIXED COMPENSATION QUANTITY 146
7205 = COMPENSATION MODE 146
7206 = CALCULATION MODE 148
7207 = AVERAGING DRIP 148
7208 = BATCH STAGES 149
7209 = INPUT FORMAT 149
7220 = OPEN VALVE 1 150
7221 = CLOSE VALVE 1 150
7222 = OPEN VALVE 2 151
7223 = CLOSE VALVE 2 151
7240 = MAXIMUM BATCHING TIME 155
7241 = MINIMUM BATCHING QUANTITY 156
7242 = MAXIMUM BATCHING QUANTITY 157
7243 = PROGRESS NOTE 157
7244 = MAX. DURCHFLUSS 158
7260 = BATCH PROCEDURE 159
7261= BATCH UPWARDS 159
7262= BATCH DOWNWARDS 160
7263 = BATCH COUNTER 160
7264 = BATCH SUM 160
7265 = RESET SUM/COUNTER 160
7280 = VALVE 1 INTERNAL SWITCH POINT 161
7281 = DRIP QUANTITY 161
7282 = FÜLLZEIT 162
7282 = VALVE 1 CLOSING TIME 161
7401 = REFERENCE CONDITION USER 163
7402 = SELECT REFERENCE CONDITION 163
7403 = WARNING MODE 163
7410 = ACQUISITION MODE 164
7411 = ACQUISITION PERIODE 164
7412 = ACQUISITION DO 164
7413 = RESET HISTORY 164
7420 = REFERENCE VALUE 165
7421 = ACTUAL VALUE 165
7422 = MINIMUM VALUE 165
7423 = MAXIMUM VALUE 165
7424 = HISTORY 1 165
7425 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 165
7426 = WARNING LEVEL 165
7430 = REFERENCE VALUE 166
7431 = ACTUAL VALUE 166
7432 = MINIMUM VALUE 166
7433 = MAXIMUM VALUE 166
7434 = HISTORY 1 166
188
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
7435 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 166
7436 = WARNING LEVEL 166
7440 = REFERENCE VALUE 167
7441 = ACTUAL VALUE 167
7442 = MINIMUM VALUE 167
7443 = MAXIMUM VALUE 167
7444 = HISTORY 1 167
7445 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 167
7446 = WARNING LEVEL 167
7450 = REFERENCE VALUE 168
7451 = ACTUAL VALUE 168
7452 = MINIMUM VALUE 168
7453 = MAXIMUM VALUE 168
7454 = HISTORY 1 168
7455 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 168
7456 = WARNING LEVEL 168
7460 = REFERENCE VALUE 169
7461 = ACTUAL VALUE 169
7462 = MINIMUM VALUE 169
7463 = MAXIMUM VALUE 169
7464 = HISTORY 1 169
7465 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 169
7466 = WARNING LEVEL 169
7470 = REFERENCE VALUE 170
7471 = ACTUAL VALUE 170
7472 = MINIMUM VALUE 170
7473 = MAXIMUM VALUE 170
7474 = HISTORY 1 170
7475 = ACTUAL DEVIATION 171
7476 = WARNING LEVEL 171
8...
8000 = ASSIGN SYSTEM ERROR 173
8001 = ERROR CATEGORY 173
8002 = ASSIGN PROCESS ERROR 173
8003 = ERROR CATEGORY 174
8004 = ACKNOWLEDGE FAULTS 174
8005 = ALARM DELAY 174
8005 = ALARMVERZÖGERUNG 175
8040 = ACTUAL SYSTEM CONDITION 176
8041 = PREVIOUS SYSTEM CONDITION 176
8042 = SIMULATION FAILSAFE MODE 176
8043 = SIMULATION MEASURAND 176
8044 = VALUE SIMULATION MEASURAND 177
8046 = SYSTEM RESET 177
8048 = OPERATION HOURS 177
8200 = SERIAL NUMBER 178
8200 = SERIENNUMMER 178
8201 = SENSOR TYPE 178
8205 = SW REV. NO. S-DAT 178
8222 = SW REV. NO. AMPLIFIER 179
8225 = SW REV. NO. T-DAT 179
8226 = LANGUAGE GROUP 179
8240 = STATUS F-CHIP 180
8241 = SYSTEM OPTION 180
8244 = SW REV. NO. F-CHIP 180
8300 = I/O MODULE TYPE 180
8303 = SW REV. NO. I/O MODULE 180
8320 = SUB-I/O TYPE 181
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Index function matrix
8323 = SW- REV. SUB-IN-/OUTPUT TYP 181
8340 = SUB-I/O TYPE 181
8343 = SW- REV. SUB-IN-/OUTPUT TYP 181
8360 = SUB-I/O TYPE 181
8363 = SW- REV. SUB-IN-/OUTPUT TYP 181
8380 = SUB-I/O TYPE 181
8383 = SW- REV. SUB-IN-/OUTPUT TYP 181
Endress+Hauser
189
Index function matrix
190
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Index key words
Index key words
A
Access code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Acknowledge faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Acquisition
Do. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Periode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Acquisition (Advanced diagnosis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Active level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Actual
Current (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Current (current output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Status Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Status (Pulse/Freq. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
System condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Additional
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Additional line
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Multiplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adjust
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Advanced diagnostics
Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Electrodynamic sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Reference density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tube damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Alarm delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Alarmverzögerung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Amplifier (Version Info) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Arbitrary unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Assign
Additional line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Additional line (Multiplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Batch variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Frequency (Pulse/Freq. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Information line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Information line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Main line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Main line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Process error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Pulse (Pulse/Freq. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Status (Pulse/Freq. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Endress+Hauser
System error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Averaging drip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
B
Basic
Configuration (user interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Batch
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Downwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Batching/Dosing (Quick Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Block
Basic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Measured variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Special function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Bus address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
C
Calculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Calibration coefficient KD 1...2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Carrier
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Close
Valve 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Valve 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Coefficient
A0...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
B1...3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Calibration
KD 1...2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Density
C 0...5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Expansion
Linear
Carrier fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Ref. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Target fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Square
Carrier fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
191
Index key words
Ref. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Target fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Temperature
KM, KM 2, KT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Commission (Quick Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Compensation
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Quantity (fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Configuration
Additional line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Advanced diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Process parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sensor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
System parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Contrast LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Corrected
Carrier volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Target volume flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Volume calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Current input
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Current output
Actual current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Current span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
D
Damping
Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Define private code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adjust mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Coefficient
C 0...5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setpoint 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setpoint 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Device (version-info) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
192
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Display
Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Display damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Display mode
Additional line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Additional line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Information line (Multiplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Drip quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Durchfluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
E
Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
End value frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
EPD
Empty pipe detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Value high. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Value low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Error category
Process error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Expansion coefficient
Linear
Carrier fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Ref. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Target fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Square
Carrier fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Ref. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Target fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
F
Factor
Arbitrary concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Arbitrary density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arbitrary mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arbitrary volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Factory settings
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Full scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Pulse value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Failsafe mode
All totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Failsafe value frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
F-CHIP (Version Info) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Fixed
Compensation quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Reference density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Format
Additional line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Additional line (Multiplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Information line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Information line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Main line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Main line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Füllzeit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Function group
Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Additional coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Additional configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Additional values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Arbitrary unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Basic configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Configuration
Additional line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Advanced diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Main line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Process parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Pulse/Freq. output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sensor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Status input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
System parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Density coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Electrodynamic sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
EPD parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
F-CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Flow coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Information
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Status input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Endress+Hauser
Index key words
Main values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Multiplex
Additional line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Information line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Main line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pressure correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Reference
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Reference parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tube damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Unlocking/Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Valve parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Function matrix
Codes identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
General layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
G
Gas measurement (Quick Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Group
Additional line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Advanced diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Current input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Density functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Handling Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Main line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Process parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Relay output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sensor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Special units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
System parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Version Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
193
Index key words
H
Handling Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hardware ID number
Input/output 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
HART
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
I
Information
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Information line
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Multiplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Input format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Input/Output 1...4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installation direction sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
K
K-Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Konzentration Auswahl (Dichtefunktion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Konzentration Name (Dichtefunktion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Language group (display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Low flow cut off
Assign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Off value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
On value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
M
Main line
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Multiplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Main values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Maximal
Temperature carrier tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Temperature measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Maximaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Maximum
Batching quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Batching time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Measure
Fluid 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fluid 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Measured variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measuring mode
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
194
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Measuring values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Minimal
Temperature carrier tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Temperature measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Minimum
Batching quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Pulse width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Mode (density function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Multiplex
Additional line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Main line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
N
Nominal diameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
O
Off value
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
On value
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Open
Valve 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Valve 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Operation
Batching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Mode (Pulse/Freq. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Status input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Operation hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Other (unit of concentration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Output signal
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Overflow
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
P
Positive zero return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Pressure
Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Shock suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Previous system condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Index key words
Process parameter
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
EPD parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pressure correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Reference
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Progress note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Pulsating flow (Quick Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pulse
Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Pulse/Frequency output
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Q
Quick setup
Batching/Dosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulsating flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
25
25
25
R
Reference
Temperature (Density function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Temperature (Ref. parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Reference condition
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Reference density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Carrier fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Target fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Reference density (fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Relay output
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switching action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Relay output (group EGA)
Limit value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reset
All totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Sum/Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Restore original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
S
Sensor data
Additional coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Density coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Endress+Hauser
136
133
135
134
178
Sensor (Version info) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Serial number sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Seriennummer Aufnehmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Simulation
Current input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Current (current output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Failsafe mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Switch point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switch point (Relay output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Software revision number
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
F-CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
S-DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
T-DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Special units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Start value frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Status access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Status F-CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Status input
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sum Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching action of the relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Switch-off delay
Relay output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Switch-on delay
Relay output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
System
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Operation hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
System condition
Actual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Previous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
System option (additional software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
System parameter
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
T
Tag
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Target
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
T-DAT Save/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Coefficient
KM, KM 2, KT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
195
Index key words
Terminal number
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Pulse/Frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Test display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Text
Arbitrary concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Arbitrary density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Arbitrary mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Arbitrary volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Time constant
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Type
Input/output 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
U
Unit
Corrected volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Corrected volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Reference density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Unlocking/Locking (user interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
20 mA (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Value Simulation
Current (current output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Status input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Switch point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Switch point (Relay output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Value simulation
Current (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Valve parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Valve 1
Closing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Internal switch point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Version Info
Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
F-CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Input/Output 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Volume flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
W
Warning mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Z
Zero
Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Point adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Symbols
% Black liquor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
% Carrier
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
% Target
Mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
°Api . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
°Balling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
°Baume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
°Brix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
°Plato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
V
Numerics
Value
F High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
F Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Simulation Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
0_4 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
0_4 mA (current input). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
100% Value
Additional line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Additional line (Multiplex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Information line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Information line (Multiplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Main line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Main line (Multiplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
196
Endress+Hauser
Device Functions Proline Promass 83
Endress+Hauser
Index key words
197
www.endress.com/worldwide
BA060D/06/en/11.04
50098510
FM+SGML 6.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising